Monarch NICE3000 new elevator controller User Manual
Below you will find brief information for elevator controller NICE3000 new. This manual describes the correct use of the NICE3000new, including product features, safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and keep it carefully for reference to future maintenance.
Advertisement
Advertisement
NICE3000 new User Manual Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the NICE3000 new
integrated elevator controller.
The NICE3000 new
is a new-generation integrated elevator controller independently developed and manufacturered by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd., by optimizing the NICE3000 controller based on a large number of applications and combining new industrial features.
The NICE3000 new
has the following advantages:
1. It supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running. It can drive both AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnetic synchronous motor
(PMSM), and implement switchover between the two types of motors easily by modifying only one parameter.
2. It supports direct parallel control and group control of two elevators, and supports the
CANbus and Modbus communication protocols for remote monitoring, which reduces the required quantity of travling cables.
3. It supports a maximum of 40 floors and is widely applied to elevators used in the residence, office buildings, shopping centers, and hospitals.
This manual describes the correct use of the NICE3000 new
, including product features, safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and keep it carefully for reference to future maintenance.
The personnel who involve in system installation, commissioning, and maintenance must receive necessary safety and use training, understand this manual thoroughly, and have related experience before performing operations.
Notes
• The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards.
Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first, and then perform operations in accordance with the instructions.
• The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product you purchased.
• The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade, specification modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of the manual.
• Contact our agents or customer service center if you need a new user manual or have problems during the use.
- 1 -
Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual
■
Product Checking
Upon unpacking, check:
• Whether the nameplate model and controller ratings are consistent with your order. The box contains the controller, certificate of conformity, user manual and warranty card.
• Whether the controller is damaged during transportation. If you find any omission or damage, contact your supplier or Monarch immediately.
■
First-time Use
For users who use this product for the first time, read the manual carefully. If you have any problem concerning the functions or performance, contact the technical support personnel of Monarch to ensure correct use.
■
CE Mark
The CE mark on the NICE3000 new
declares that the controller complies with the European low voltage directive (LVD) and EMC directive.
■
Standard Compliance
The NICE3000 new standards:
series controller complies with the following LVD and EMC directives and
Directive
EMC Directive
Directive Code
2004/18/EC
Standard
EN 61800-3: 2004+A1: 2012
EN 12015: 2004
EN 12016: 2004+A1: 2008
EN 61800-5-1 LVD Directive 2006/95/EC
The NICE3000 new
series controller complies with the requirements of the EMC standard on the condition of correct installation and use by following the instructions in chapter 9 "EMC".
- 2 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction
Introduction
1. Comparison with the NICE3000
The following table lists the comparison between the NICE3000 new
and the NICE3000.
Item
Maximum number of floors
Maximum elevator speed
I/O terminals
CANbus
Modbus
Motor driving type
No-load-cell startup
Control mode
Inside-car commissioning
NICE3000
31 (standard)
4 m/s
24 inputs, 6 outputs
1 x CANbus
1 x Modbus
Separate control for synchronous and asynchronous motors
Supporting SIN/COS encoder only
• Sensorless vector control (SVC)
• Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
Not support
40 (standard)
NICE3000 new
4 m/s
24 inputs, 6 outputs, 3 higher-voltage inputs
2 x CANbus
1 x Modbus
Integrated control for synchronous and asynchronous motors
Supporting:
• Push-pull encoder
• Open-collector incremental encoder
• UVW encoder
• SIN/COS encoder
• Endat encoder
• Sensorless vector control (SVC)
• Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
• V/F control
Support
- 3 -
Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual
2. Connection to peripheral devices
Three-phase AC power supply
Moulded case circuit breaker
(MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
Electromagnetic contactor
AC input reactor
Use within the allowable power supply specification of the controller.
Select a proper breaker to resist large in-rush current that flows into the controller at power-on.
To guarantee safety, use an electromagnetic contactor. Do not use it to start or stop the controller because such operation reduces the service life of the controller.
Suppress the high order harmonic to improve the power factor.
External operation panel
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
Hz
RPM
A
%
V
PRG ENTER
QUICK
RUN MF.K
STOP
RES
Voice announcement
Noise filter on input side
Reduce the electromagnetic interference on the input side.
NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller
MCTC-CTB
Car display board
MCTC-CCB
MCTC-HCB
Top floor
Ground
Reliably ground the motor and the controller to prevent electric shock.
Ground
Braking unit
Output reactor
MCTC-HCB
Bottom floor
Braking resistor
BR
P(+)
+
-
Motor
Ground
• Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge suppressor.
• Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an antiinterference filter to minimize the interference.
• For more details on peripheral devices, refer to related selection guidelines.
- 4 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction
3. Function list of the NICE3000 new
Full collective selective
Door open time setting
Door open holding
Door machine service floor setting
Door pre-close by the door close button
Floor number display setting
Light curtain signal judgment
Auxiliary operation box
Independent control of the front door and back door
Repeat door close
Independent command
Voice announcement
Auto-leveling
Response at acceleration
Down collective selective control
Idle elevator returning to base floor
Common Running Functions
In automatic running or attendant state, this function enables the elevator to respond both car calls and hall calls. Passengers at any service floor can call the elevator by pressing the up call button and down call button.
The system automatically determines different door open time for door open for call, command, protection, or delay according to the set door open holding time.
In automatic running state, passengers can press the door open button in the car to delay door open to facilitate goods to be moved in or out.
You can set the required service floors of the door machines.
During door open holding in automatic running state, passengers can press the door close button to close the door in advance, which improves the efficiency.
The system supports display of floor numbers in combinations of numbers and letters, which meets the requirements of special conditions.
If the door is blocked by stuff during door close, the light curtain acts and the elevator opens the door. This function is invalid in fire emergency state.
An optional auxiliary operation box that has the same functions as the main operation box is available.
When there are two doors for a car, automatic control on the two doors depends on your requirements.
If the door lock is not applied after the elevator performs door close for a certain time, the elevator automatically opens the door and then closes the door again.
When the main and auxiliary operation boxes are configured, they can independently control door open/close according to the commands in automatic running state.
The elevator automatically announces information such as the running direction and next arriving floor during running.
The systems implements automatic accurate leveling based on the floor pulse counting and up/down leveling feedback signals.
The system allows the elevator to automatically respond to calls from the service floors during acceleration.
In automatic running or attendant state, the elevator responds only to hall down calls besides car calls.
In automatic running state, the elevator automatically returns to the set parking floor and waits for passengers if there is no car call or hall call within the set time.
- 5 -
Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual
Landing at another floor
Forced door close
Cancellation of wrong calls
Service floor setting
Time-based floor service
Independent running
Attendant running
Low-speed selfrescue
Door control function
Car arrival gong
Hall arrival forecast indicator
Hall arrival gong
Hall I/O extension function
Car I/O extension function
Button stuck check
Automatic startup torque compensation
Direct travel ride
Automatic generation of optimum curve
If the door open time exceeds the door open protection time but the door open limit signal is still inactive, the elevator closes the door and then automatically runs to the next landing floor. The system reports fault Err55.
When the door fails to close within the set time due to the action of the light curtain or safety edge, the elevator enters the forced door close state, closes the door slowly, and gives a prompt tone.
Passengers can press the button consecutively twice to cancel wrong calls.
You can enable or disable the system service for certain floors flexibly based on actual requirements.
You can flexibly set the time periods and corresponding service floors or select the service floors by using the service floor switchover switch.
The elevator does not respond to any call, and the door needs to be closed manually. In the case of group control, the elevator runs independently out of the group control system.
In attendant state, the running of the elevator is controlled by the attendant.
When the elevator is in non-inspection state and stops at non-leveling area, the elevator automatically runs to the leveling area at low speed if the safety requirements are met, and then opens the door.
You can set whether the system keeps outputting commands after door open limit and door close limit based on the type of the door machine.
After the elevator arrives at the destination floor, the CTB gives a prompt tone.
When the elevator will arrive at the destination floor soon, the hall arrival forecast indicator becomes ON.
After the elevator will arrive at the destination floor soon, the system outputs the hall arrival gong.
If the hall I/O terminals are not sufficient, more terminals can be provided by using an HCB-B board.
If the car I/O terminals are not sufficient, more terminals can be provided by using an HCB-B board.
The system can automatically identify whether a hall call button is stuck and cancel the stuck call, preventing the condition that the elevator cannot close and run due to stuck hall calls.
The system automatically implements startup torque compensation based on the current car load, achieving smooth startup and improving the riding comfort.
The system automatically calculates and generates the running curves based on the distance, enabling the elevator to directly stop at the leveling position without creeping.
The system automatically calculates the optimum speed curve compliant with the human-machine function principle based on the distance, without being limited by the number of curves or short floor.
- 6 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction
Service suspension output
Running times recording
Running time recording
Automatic door open upon door lock abnormality
VIP service
Specified elevator preferred
Disability service
Full-load direct running
Overload protection
Fault data recording
Simple maintenance keypad
Operation box commissioning
Shaft auto-tuning
User-defined parameter display
Inspection running
Motor auto-tuning
Floor position intelligent correction
When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the corresponding terminal outputs the service suspension signal.
In automatic running state, the system automatically records the running times of the elevator.
The system automatically records the accumulative power-on time, working hours, and working days of the elevator.
If the system detects that the door lock circuit is abnormal during door open/close, the elevator automatically opens and closes the door again, and reports a fault after the set door open/close times is reached.
The elevator first directly runs to the VIP floor and provides services for special persons.
The specified elevator is preferred to respond to calls of specified floors.
When the elevator is waiting at the leveling position, if there is a call at this floor from the disability operation box, the door open holding time is prolonged. It is the same for the back door.
When the car is full-loaded in automatic running state, the elevator does not respond to hall calls from the passing floors. These halls calls, however, can still be registered, and will be executed at next time of running (in the case of single elevator) or by another elevator (in the case of parallel/group control).
When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the elevator alarms and stops running.
The system automatically records detailed information of faults, which helps improve the efficiency of maintenance and repair.
Inspection-related Functions
The 3-button keypad on the MCB provides the functions such as commissioning the running floors and door open/close.
The operation panel can be connected to the system in the car for elevator commissioning, which improves the commissioning efficiency.
Shaft auto-tuning is required before first-time automatic running. During shaft auto-tuning, the elevator runs from the bottom floor to the top floor at the inspection speed and automatically records all position signals in the shaft.
You can view the parameters that are modified and different from the default setting.
After entering the inspection state, the system cancels automatic running and related operations. You can press the up or down call button to make the elevator jog at the inspection speed.
With simple parameter setting, the system can obtain the motor parameters no matter whether the motor is with-load or without load.
Every time the elevator runs to the terminal floor, the system automatically checks and corrects the car position information based on slow-down switch 1, and eliminates over travel top terminal or bottom terminal with use of the slow-down switches.
- 7 -
Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual
Dual-speed for inspection
Test running
Returning to base floor at fire emergency
Firefighter running
Security floor
Elevator lock
Troubleshooting based on fault level
Runaway prevention
Automatic identification of power failure
Automatic running mode switchover at power failure
Running direction self-identification at power failure
Base floor verification
Considering inaccurate running control at high inspection speed but a long running time at low inspection speed, the system provides the dual-speed curve for inspection, which greatly improves the efficiency at inspection.
The test running includes the fatigue test of a new elevator, car call floor test, hall call test, and tests such as hall call response forbidden, door open/close forbidden, terminal floor limit switch shielded, and overload signal shielded.
Fire Emergency and Security Functions
After receiving a fire emergency signal, the elevator does not respond to any call but directly runs to the fire emergency floor and waits.
After the elevator enters the firefighter running mode, door open/close is implemented by the jog operation (optional) by using the door open and close buttons rather than automatically. In addition, the elevator responds to only car calls and only one call can be registered once.
After the security floor function is enabled, the security floor is used at
10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m, and the elevator runs to the security floor first every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination floor.
In automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch acts or the set elevator time is reached, the elevator cancels all registered calls, returns to the elevator lock floor, stops running, and turns off the lamp and fan in the car.
Faults are classified into different levels based on the severity. Different levels of faults are rectified using different methods.
The system detects the running state of the elevator in real time. If the elevator speed exceeds the limit, the system immediately stops running of the elevator.
The system automatically identifies power failure and outputs the relay signal for emergency evacuation automatic switchover to implement emergency evacuation at power failure.
For the synchronous motor, when the power supply is interrupted, the system can perform automatic switchover between shorting stator braking mode and controller drive mode, implementing quick and stable self-rescue.
Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power failure, UPS is used, the motor stator is shorted, and the brake is automatically released, making the car move slowly under the effect of the weighing difference between the car and the counterweight.
When the power supply is interrupted, the system can automatically identify the current car load and determine the running direction.
After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs the elevator to each floor until reaching the terminal floor for verification, guaranteeing system security.
- 8 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction
Passenger unloading first upon fault
Interference degree judgment
Earthquake protection
Current cancellation in ramp mode
Independent working power supply
Automatic voltage identification
Parallel control
Dispersed waiting
Parallel/Group control exit
Parallel/Group control automatic exit
Anti-nuisance function
Prompt of non-door zone stop
Full-load indication
Interface for intelligent residential management
The system automatically determines the fault level. If the safety running conditions are met, the elevator first runs to the leveling position to unload passengers.
The system judges the degree of communication interference.
When the earthquake detection device acts and inputs a signal to the system, the elevator lands at the nearest floor and stops running. After the earthquake signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually, the elevator restores to normal running.
For the PMSM, after the elevator decelerates to stop, the holding current of the motor is cancelled in ramp mode, preventing abnormal noise during current cancellation.
The NICE3000 new
system supports not only three-phase 380 VAC but also single-phase 220 VAC to meet different applications of the power supply system (such as 220 V UPS)
The system detects the bus voltage and automatically adjusts the running speed of the elevator to adapt to the situation of insufficient power from power supply (such as emergency UPS).
Parallel/Group Control and Other Functions
The system supports parallel control of two elevators and provides multiple scheduling algorithms to meet requirements of different customers.
In parallel/group control, the elevators can wait at different floors.
If the parallel/group control exit switch of a certain elevator in a parallel/ group control system is valid or the time for exiting the parallel/group control is reached, the elevator exits parallel/group control and runs independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group control system.
If an elevator in the parallel/group control system cannot respond to calls in time due to faults, the elevator automatically exits the parallel/ group control system and runs independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group control system.
The system automatically judges the number of passengers in the car and compares it with the number of registered car calls. If there are excessive car calls, the system determines that it is nuisance and cancels all car calls. In this case, passengers need to register correct car calls again.
The system gives a prompt when the elevator stops at a non-door zone area due to faults.
When the elevator is full-loaded, a full-load indication is displayed on the HCBs and the elevator directly runs to the desired floors.
The system provides an interface for intelligent residential management to perform remote monitoring on the state of elevators in the residential district.
- 9 -
Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual
Car energy-saving
Energy-saving running with standby power supply
Arrival gong disabled at night
Energy-saving of idle door machine
Energy-saving Functions
If there is no running command within the set time, the system automatically cuts off the power supply to the lamp and fan in the car.
When the normal power supply is interrupted and the emergency power supply is used, the system reduces the running speed of the elevator in the prerequisite of guaranteeing the smooth running curve.
Within the set time period, the arrival gong is disabled.
After the car lamp is turned off, the system does not output the door close command, which reduces power consumption of the door machine.
4. Optional functions
Function
Micro-leveling
Power failure emergency evacuation
Onsite commissioning
Residential monitoring
Door pre-open
IC card
Description
After landing at a floor, the elevator may move upward or downward due to the load change and the car door is not aligned with the ground, which is inconvenient for in and out of passengers and goods. In this case, the system allows the elevator to run to the leveling position in the door open state at the leveling speed.
For the elevator configured with UPS, the system uses the UPS to implement low-speed self-rescue in the case of power failure.
The system can control and monitor running of elevators by using the NEMS software.
The control system can be connected to the terminal in the monitoring room. By using the NEMS software, you can view the floor position, running direction, and fault state of the elevator.
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller than 0.2 m/s and the door zone signal is active, the system shorts the door lock by means of the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door open signal, implementing door pre-open.
This improves the elevator use efficiency.
Passengers need to use the IC card to go to floors that require authorization.
Remark
MCTC-SCB required
UPS required
NEMS software required
NEMS, accessories, and MCTC-
MIB required
MCTC-SCB required
IC card required
- 10 -
Contents
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions.....................................................14
2.1 System Configuration of the NICE3000 new
......................................................................22
Integrated Elevator Controller ...................................................................34
3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000 new
Control System ......................................61
Chapter 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools .........................................................68
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example ...............................78
1
Safety Information and Precautions
Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions
In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:
•
DANGER
indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injury or even death.
•
WARNING
indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in potential risk of severe personal injury or even death.
•
CAUTION
indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in minor or moderate personal injury or equipment damage.
In addition,
NOTE
appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or situation may occur if the notice is not complied with.
The notices in this manual you have to observe are aimed at guaranteeing your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to the controller or the parts connected to it. Read this chapter carefully so that you have a thorough understanding and perform all operations by following the notices in this chapter. Monarch will assume no liability or responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Precautions
Use Stage
Safety
Grade
Warning
WARNING
Precautions
• This controller has hazardous high voltage and the controlled motor is a dangerous rotating device. Failure to comply with the notices may result in personal injury or damage to the property.
• Transportation, installation, operation and maintenance of the controller can be performed only by qualified personnel after they get familiar with the safety information in this manual. This is the prerequisite of safe and stable running of the equipment.
• Do not open the front cover or touch the power terminals on the main circuit within 10 minutes after the controller is powered off. The capacitor on the DC circuit still has residual high voltage even after power-off. Failure to comply will result in electric shock.
- 14 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions
Use Stage
During installation
At wiring
Safety
Grade
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Precautions
• Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage, component missing or damage upon unpacking.
• Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform to the product you received.
• Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
• Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components, especially the screws with red mark.
• Do not install the controller on vibrating parts. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment or unexpected accidents.
• Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent damage to the equipment.
• Do not drop wire end or screw into the controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Do not use the equipment with damaged or missing components. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
• Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to comply will result in static electricity damage.
• Install the controller in places free of vibration and direct sunlight.
• Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents.
• A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the controller. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
• Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Tie the controller to ground properly according to the standard. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U,
V, W) of the controller. Pay attention to the marks of the wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals (+) and (-). Failure to comply may result in a fire.
• Ensure that the cabling satisfies the EMC requirements and local codes. Use wire sizes recommended in the manual.
Failure to comply may result in accidents.
• Use the shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the shield is reliably grounded at one end.
• Use a twisted cable with twisted distance of 20−30 mm as the communication cable, and ensure that the shield is reliably grounded.
- 15 -
Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual
Use Stage
During running
Safety
Grade
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Precautions
• All peripheral devices must be connected properly according to the circuit wiring instructions provided in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in accidents
• Cover the controller properly before power-on to prevent electric shock.
• Do not open the controller’s cover after power-on. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch the controller and peripheral circuits with wet hand. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch any I/O terminal of the controller. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• The controller performs safety detection on external strong power circuits automatically at the beginning of power-on.
Do not touch the U, V, W terminals of the controller or the motor terminals at the moment. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt.
• Signal detection must be performed only by qualified personnel during operation. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the controller.
• Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in accidents.
• Check that the following requirements are met:
• The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the controller.
• The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) are properly connected.
• No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
• The wiring is secured.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• For synchronous motor, ensure that motor auto-tuning is performed successfully. Perform trial running before resuming the steel rope so as to make the motor run properly.
• Avoid objects falling into the controller when it is running.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the controller because such test has been done in the factory.
Failure to comply may result in accidents.
• Do not change the default settings of the controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Do not start/stop the controller by turning on or off the contactor. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
- 16 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions
Use Stage
During maintenance
Disposal
Safety
Grade
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
Precautions
• Do not repair or maintain the controller at power-on. Failure to comply will result in electric shock.
• Repair or maintain the controller when its voltage is lower than 36 VAC, about 10 minutes after the controller is powered off. Otherwise, the residual voltage in the capacitor may result in personal injury.
• Do not allow unqualified personnel to repair or maintain the controller. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the controller.
• Repair or maintenance of the controller can be performed only by the warranty center or qualified personnel authorized by Monarch. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the controller.
• Power supply must be cut off before repair or maintenance of the controller.
• Set the parameters again after the controller is replaced. All the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only after power-off.
• Strictly obey the laws and regulations and repair and maintain the elevator equipment periodically. Only timely troubleshooting can ensure the safety of passengers.
The packaging materials, screws and terminal blocks can be re-used and it is suggested that you keep them well for future use.
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary industrial waste.
1.2 General Precautions
1. Requirement on the residual current device (RCD)
The controller generates high leakage current during running, which flows through the protective earthing conductor. Thus install a type- B RCD at primary side of the power supply. When selecting the RCD, you should consider the transient and steady-state leakage current to ground that may be generated at startup and during running of the controller. You can select a specialized RCD with the function of suppressing high harmonics or a generalpurpose RCD with relatively large residual current.
2. High leakage current warning
DANGER
The controller generates high leakage current during running, which flows through the protective earthing conductor. Earth connection must be done before connection of power supply. Earthing shall comply with local regulations and related IEC standards.
- 17 -
Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual
3. Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor insulation of motor windings from damaging the controller. The motor must be disconnected from the controller during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for the test. Ensure that the insulation resistance is not less than 5 MΩ.
4. Thermal protection of motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the controller, especially when the rated power of the controller is greater than that of the motor, adjust the motor protection parameters on the operation panel of the controller or install a thermal relay for the motor circuit for protection.
5. Motor heat and noise
The output of the controller is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic wave, and therefore, the motor temperature rise, noise, and vibration are slightly greater than those at running with the mains frequency.
6. Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on the output side of the controller
The controller outputs PWM waves, and therefore, do not install the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor on the output side of the controller. Otherwise, the controller may suffer transient overcurrent or even be damaged.
7. Contactor on the input and output sides of the controller
When a contactor is installed between the input side of the controller and the power supply, the controller must not be started or stopped by turning on or off the contactor. When a contactor is installed between the output side of the controller and the motor, do not turn on or off the contactor when the controller has output. Otherwise, modules inside the controller may be damaged.
Contactor KM
Contactor KM or other switches
380 VAC
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
Controller
U
V
W
M
8. Use outside the rated voltage
The controller must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this manual. Otherwise, components inside the controller may be damaged. If required, use a corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device.
9. Surge suppressor
The controller has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge voltage generated when the inductive loads (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake) around the controller are switched on or off. If the inductive loads generate very high surge voltage, use a surge suppressor for the inductive load or use a surge suppressor together with a diode.
- 18 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions
Note
Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
10. Altitude and de-rating
In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it is necessary to de-rate the controller. Contact Monarch for technical support.
11. Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary industrial waste.
12. Adaptable motor
The controller is adaptable to squirrel-cage asynchronous motor or AC PMSM. Select a proper controller according to motor nameplate.
The default parameters configured inside the controller are squirrel-cage asynchronous motor parameters. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default values based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running effect and protection performance will be affected. For PMSM, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
13. Precautions on selecting residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Tripping may be caused if an improper RCCB is selected when the controller drives the motor. This is because the output wave of the controller has high harmonics and the motor cable and the cable connecting the controller and the motor produce leakage current, which is much larger than the current when the motor runs at the mains frequency.
Thus, it is necessary to determine the proper RCCB sensitivity based on the general leakage current of the cables and the motor. The leakage current is dependent on the motor capacity, cable length, insulation class and wiring method. Generally, the leakage current on the output side of the controller is three times of the current when the motor runs at the mains frequency.
1.3 Protective Functions
Adopting different protective functions for different levels of faults, the NICE3000 faults, see chapter 8.
new
provides the elevator running system with full abnormality protection. For detailed solutions to the
Faults of the controller are classified as follows:
1. Speed abnormal
The controller monitors the encoder feedback speed and output torque. Once the feedback speed exceeds the limit or the deviation between the torque limit and the speed feedback is too large, the controller performs protection immediately, reports an alarm and prohibits running.
- 19 -
Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual
2. Drive control abnormal
The related faults include drive overcurrent, overvoltage/undervoltage, power input/ output phase loss, overload, and storage abnormality. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately, stops output, applies the brake and prohibits running.
3. Encoder abnormal
The related faults include encoder phase loss, direction reversing, wire-breaking, and pulse interference. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately to avoid unexpected accidents. If pulse interference is large, the controller reports an alarm immediately. If pulse interference is small, the controller performs position correction every time it receives a leveling signal and clears the accumulative error.
4. Leveling sensor abnormal
The related faults include sensor failure or sensor stuck. The controller judges whether a fault occurs based on the leveling signal change. If the leveling signal does not change within the set time, the system reports an alarm.
5. Floor data abnormal
The system stores the floor information through the shaft auto-tuning. If the floor data is abnormal, the system prompts the fault information at the first-time running. During actual running, the controller continuously compares position information input by DIs with the stored floor data. If the deviation is large, the system reports an alarm.
- 20 -
2
Product Information
Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 2 Product Information
2.1 System Configuration of the NICE3000
new
The NICE3000 new
series integrated elevator control system combines the functions of both elevator controller and the high-performance vector controller. It mainly includes the integrated elevator controller, car top board (MCTC-CTB), hall call board (MCTC-HCB), car call board (MCTC-CCB), and optional door pre-open module, and remote monitoring system.
The following figure shows the system components.
Figure 2-1 System components of the NICE3000 new
NICE3000 new
integrated controller
LED operation panel
(MDKE)
Host computer
Communication in parallel mode
CANbus
Modbus
MCTC-HCB
CANbus
Synchronous or asynchronous motor
MCTC-CTB
MCTC-HCB
Load cell MCTC-HCB MCTC-CCB
1. It controls the motor based on feedback signals from the encoder, and records information of all position switches in the shaft by pulse, implementing accurate leveling and direct travel ride and guaranteeing running safety.
2. It implements information collection and control of car-related components by means of
CANbus communication with the MCTC-CTB.
3. It registers and displays hall calls of all floors with easy address setting by means of
Modbus communication with the MCTC-HCB.
- 22 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information
The following figure shows the system structure of the NICE3000 new
.
Figure 2-2 System structure of the NICE3000 new
MCTC-HCB
Modbus
NICE3000 new integrated controller
MCTC-CTB
CANbus
Power supply circuit
MCTC-CCB
MCTC-HCB
Modbus
Drive circuit of the motor U
V
W
Input power
Encoder feedback
M
Encoder
Motor
MCTC-HCB
Braking unit
MCTC-HCB
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description
Figure 2-3 Designation rules and nameplate of the NICE3000 new
NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller
NICE–L–C–40 15
NICE series integrated elevator controller
Mark
L
Mark
A
B
C
Controller Type
Specialized for elevators
Motor Type
Asynchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous
/Asynchronous motor integrator
Nameplate position
Nameplate
Controller model
Rated input
Rated output
Manufacturing SN
Mark
20
40
Voltage Class
Single-phase/
Three-phase 220 V
Three-phase 380 V
Mark
02
03
...
30
45
Power Class
2.2 kW
3.7 kW
...
30 kW
45 kW
MODEL: NICE-L-C-4015
INPUT: 3PH AC 380~440V 36A 50/60Hz
OUTPUT: 3PH AC 0~440V 33A 0~90Hz 15KW
S/N: 010150602803825403
Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd
- 23 -
Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual
2.3 Models and Specifications
Table 2-1 NICE3000 new
models and specifications
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
NICE-L-C-4011
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045
Power Capacity
(kVA)
Input Current
(A)
Output Current
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
(A)
2.0
9.2
5.2
2.9
3.9
5.9
13.3
17.9
25.3
7.5
10.3
15.5
7.3
8.6
10.6
13.1
31.3
34.6
42.6
52.6
19
22.5
27.7
34.6
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
4.0
11.0
9.6
5.9
17.0
14.0
4.0
5.9
8.9
11.0
17.0
21.0
7.0
10.0
12.6
20.5
29.0
36.0
18.0
27.0
33.0
15.0
18.3
41.0
49.0
39.0
48.0
23.0
62.0
60.0
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
24.0
30.0
40.0
57.0
69.0
6.5
10.5
14.8
20.5
29.0
36.0
41.0
49.5
62.0
77.0
93.0
39.0
48.0
60.0
75.0
91.0
5.1
9.0
13.0
18.0
27.0
33.0
Motor Power
(kW)
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
11
15
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
- 24 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-4055
NICE-L-C-4075
NICE-L-C-4090
NICE-L-C-4110
NICE-L-C-4132
NICE-L-C-4160
Power Capacity
(kVA)
85.0
114.0
134.0
160.0
192.0
231.0
Input Current
(A)
113.0
157.5
180.0
214.0
256.0
307.0
Output Current
(A)
112.0
150.0
176.0
210.0
253.0
304.0
Motor Power
(kW)
55.0
75.0
90.0
110.0
132.0
160.0
Note
1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-L-C-2002 and NICE-L-C-2003 are specially designed for 220 VAC. The other models that are marked by prefixing "220-" are modified from the three-phase 380 VAC models.
2. Same models are available for single-phase 220 VAC and three-phase 220 VAC. Pay attentions to the power class of the adaptable motor during the use.
3. Select the proper controller output current based on the rated motor current. Ensure that the controller output current is equal to or greater than the rated motor current.
4. If you require higher voltage or power class, contact Monarch.
2.4 Technical Specifications
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the NICE3000 new
Basic specifications
Item
Maximum frequency 99 Hz
Carrier frequency
Motor control mode
Startup torque
Specification
2–16 kHz, adjusted automatically based on the load features
Sensorless vector control (SVC)
Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
0.5 Hz: 180% (SVC)
0 Hz: 200% (CLVC)
Speed adjustment range
Speed stability accuracy
1:100 (SVC)
1:1000 (CLVC)
1:50 (V/F)
±0.5% (SVC)
±0.05% (CLVC)
Torque control accuracy
±5% (CLVC)
Overload
Motor auto-tuning
60s for 150% of the rated current, 1s for 200% of the rated current
With-load auto-tuning; no-load auto-tuning
- 25 -
Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual
Basic specifications
I/O feature
Operation and display
Item
Distance control
Specification
Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position can be adjusted flexibly
Acceleration/
Deceleration curve
Startup torque compensation
Real-time clock
N curves generated automatically
Slow-down
Shaft auto-tuning
New reliable slow-down function, automatically identifying the position of the slow-down shelf
32-bit data, recording the position in the shaft accurately
Leveling adjustment Flexible and easy leveling adjustment function
Load cell startup pre-torque compensation
No-load-cell startup pre-torque self-adaption
Real-time clock for time-based floor service, peak service and automatic password
Test function
Fault protection
Intelligent management
Security check of peripheral devices after power-on
Easy to implement multiple elevators commissioning functions.
Solutions to different levels of elevator faults
Remote monitoring, user management, and group control adjustment
Security check of peripheral devices, such as grounding and short circuit, after power-on
Status monitor
Digital input (DI)
Analog input (AI)
Communication port
Output terminal block
Encoder interface
Keypad
LED operation panel
Status monitor
Monitoring the state of feedback signals to ensure that the elevator works properly
24 x DI
Input specification: 24 V, 5 mA
3 heavy-current detection input terminals of safety circuit and door lock circuit
Input specification: 95−125 V
AI (voltage range: –10 V to +10 V)
2 CANbus communication ports
1 Modbus communication port
6 relay outputs
The terminals can be allocated with different functions.
Supporting different encoders by using an optional
PG card
3-digit LED display, implementing certain commissioning functions
5-digit LED display, querying/modifying most parameters and monitoring the system state
Connecting the control system and the host computer, convenient for querying/motoring the system state.
- 26 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information
Environment
Environment
Item
Altitude
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Storage temperature
IP level
Pollution degree
Power distribution system
Specification
Below 1000 m (de-rated 1% for each 100 m higher)
–10°C to 40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature is above 40°C, maximum temperature: 50°C)
Maximum relative humidity 95%, non-condensing
Maximum vibration: 5.9 m/s
2
(10–55 Hz, 0.35 mm)
–20°C to 60°C
IP20
PD2
TN, TT
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions
The following figures show the physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the
NICE3000 new
.
Figure 2-4 Physical appearance of the NICE3000 new
- 27 -
Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 2-5 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000 new
W
A
Φ
D
The NICE3000 new
has different sizes. The following table lists the mounting dimensions of models under these sizes.
Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000 new
Controller Model
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
H
(mm)
W
(mm)
D
(mm)
Hole
Diameter
(mm)
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L1-C-4007
220-NICE-L1-C-4011
220-NICE-L1-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
Single-phase/Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
150
150
190
235
334.5
334.5
305
347
347
322
223
223
208
541.5 554.5 289.6
143
173.5
212
223
6.5
6.5
6
6.5
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
150 334.5
347 223 143 6.5
Gross
Weight
(kg)
5.5
7
7
14.5
5.5
Size
SIZE-C
SIZE-D
SIZE-E
SIZE-C
- 28 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information
Controller Model
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
H
(mm)
W
(mm)
D
(mm)
Hole
Diameter
(mm)
Gross
Weight
(kg)
Size
NICE-L -C-4007
NICE-L -C-4011
NICE-L -C-4015
NICE-L1-C-4007
NICE-L1-C-4011
NICE-L1-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045
NICE-L-C-4055
NICE-L-C-4075
NICE-L-C-4090
NICE-L-C-4110
NICE-L-C-4132
NICE-L-C-4160
150
190
235
260
343
449
334.5
305
347
322
223
208
541.5 554.5 289.6
580
678
903
549
660
880
385
473
579
173.5
212
223
265
307
380
6.5
6
6.5
10
10
10
7
7
14.5
32
47
90
SIZE-D
SIZE-E
SIZE-F
SIZE-G
SIZE-H
Note
For the models of other higher power classes that are still not often applied onsite, the preceding table does not list the mounting dimensions. If you need such models, directly contact Monarch.
- 29 -
Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual
2.6 Optional Parts
If any optional part in the following table is required, specify it in your order.
Table 2-4 Optional parts of the NICE3000 new
Model Name
External braking unit
PG card
Car top board
(CTB)
Hall call board (HCB)
Car call board (CCB)
External LED operation panel
Extension cable
MDBUN
MCTC-PG-A2
MCTC-PG-D
MCTC-PG-E
MCTC-PG-F1
MCTC-CTB
MCTC-HCB
MCTC-CCB
MDKE
MDCAB
Function
It is provided for the NICE3000 new of 37 kW and above.
It is used to adapt to the push-pull and open-collector incremental encoders.
It is used to adapt to the UVW differential encoder and applied to synchronous motor.
It requires 5 V power supply.
It is used to adapt to the SIN/COS encoder.
It is used to adapt to the absolute encoder (Heidenhain
ECN413/1313)
The MCTC-CTB is the car control board of the NICE3000 new
. It has
8 DIs, 1 AI and 9 relay outputs (7 as standard configuration). It can communicate with the CCB and
HCB simultaneously.
The HCB receives the passenger calls and displays the floor where the elevator is located and the running direction. It can also be used as car display board.
The MCTC-CCB is another interface for passengers to interact with the control system. It mainly collects the car alls and outputs the call indicator state.
Remark
For details, see section 2.7 "Selection of Braking Resistor".
-
-
-
-
-
-
A number of HCB models are available.
For details, see section 3.3.
It is the external LED display and operation panel.
It is a standard 8-core network cable and can be connected to
MDKE and MDKE3.
It provides the
RJ45 interface for connecting to the controller.
The cable length is
3 m in the standard configuration.
- 30 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information
2.7 Selection of Braking Components
The NICE3000 new models of 30 kW and below have a built-in braking unit, and you only need to connect an external braking resistor between PB and + terminals. For models above 30 kW, you need to install a braking unit and a braking resistor externally.
Select the braking resistor based on the configuration listed in the following table.
Table 2-5 Braking resistor selection for the NICE3000 new models
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
NICE-L-C-4011
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
Power of
Adaptable
Motor (kW)
Max.
Resistor
(Ω)
Min.
Resistance
(Ω)
Power of
Braking
Resistor (W)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
1.1 145.0 125.0 300
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
105.0
72.0
43.0
40.0
90.0
63.0
37.0
35.0
450
600
1100
1200
5.5
11.0
29.0
18.0
25.0
16.0
1600
3500
15.0 13.0 13.0 4500
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
2.2
3.7
72.0
54.0
65.0
50.0
600
1100
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
40.0
29.0
26.0
14.5
35.0
25.0
22.0
13.0
1200
1600
2500
3500
7.5
11
15
18.5
15.0
18.5
13.0
12.5
12.5
12.0
4500
5500
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
2.2
290 230 600
3.7
5.5
170
115
135
90
1100
1600
22
30
85
55
43
34.0
24
20
65
43
35
25
22
16
2500
3500
4500
5500
6500
9000
Braking Unit
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
- 31 -
Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045
NICE-L-C-4055
NICE-L-C-4075
NICE-L-C-4090
NICE-L-C-4110
NICE-L-C-4132
NICE-L-C-4160
Power of
Adaptable
Motor (kW)
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
Max.
Resistor
(Ω)
16.0
14.0
12.0
16×2
14 x 2
12 x 2
13.5 x 3
12 x 3
Min.
Resistance
(Ω)
13
11
10
13 x 2
13 x 2
9 x 2
10.5 x 3
9 x 3
Power of
Braking
Resistor (W)
11000
13500
18000 x 2
14000 x 3
18000 x 3
Braking Unit
MDBUN-60-T
MDBUN-60-T
16500 MDBUN-90-T
12000 x 2 MDBUN-60-T x 2
13500×2 MDBUN-60-T x 2
MDBUN-90-T x 2
MDBUN-90-T x 3
MDBUN-90-T x 3
Note
1. The preceding configuration takes the synchronous motor as an example. The asynchronous motor has poor energy transfer efficiency, and you can reduce the power of the braking resistor or increase the resistance of the braking resistor.
2. It is recommended that you select the braking resistor closest to the minimum resistance.
3. "x 2" indicates that two sets are required. Take NICE-L-C-4110 as an example: "9 x 2, 18000 x 2, MDBUN-90-T x 2" indicates that two sets of (9 Ω, 15000 W) braking resistor + MDBUN-90-T braking unit are connected in parallel to the controller. "x 3" indicates that three sets are required.
- 32 -
3
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.1 NICE3000
new
Integrated Elevator Controller
3.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements
Item
Ambient temperature
-10°C to 50°C
Requirements
Heat dissipation
Mounting location
Vibration
Protective enclosure
Install the controller on the surface of an incombustible object, and ensure that there is sufficient space around for heat dissipation.
Install the controller vertically on the support using screws.
Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Less than 0.6 g
The controllers of plastic housing are whole-unit built-in products operated through remote control and need to be installed in the final system. The final system must have the required fireproof cover, electrical protective cover and mechanical protective cover, and satisfy the regional laws & regulations and related IEC requirements.
3.1.2 Installation Clearance Requirements
The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the NICE3000 new shown in the following figure.
, as
Figure 3-1 Clearance around the NICE3000 new
for installation
Hot air
A
B
NICE3000 new
A
Installation clearance requirements on the NICE3000 power classes new
of different
Power Class Clearance Requirements
1.1-18.5 kW A ≥ 10 mm B ≥ 100 mm
22-45 kW A
≥ 50 mm B ≥ 100 mm
B
Cold air
The controller should be installed veritically upward.
The NICE3000 new
is installed vertically upward on the support with screws fixed into the four mounting holes, as shown in the following figure.
- 34 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-2 Diagram of mounting holes
NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller
Fastener
1.1 kW
≤
P
≤
15 kW
4-M5x15 bolt
4-M5x15 screw
4-M5x15 washer
18.5 kW
≤
P
≤
45 kW
4-M6x15 bolt
4-M6x15 screw
4-M6x15 washer
Fixing backplane
Fastening torque
2.5 Nm
With fixing washer
3.5 Nm
With fixing washer
The controller is generally installed in the control cabinet of the elevator equipment room.
Pay attention to the following points when designing the control cabinet:
1. The temperature inside the cabinet must not rise to 10°C higher than the temperature outside the cabinet.
2. A closed control cabinet must be configured with a fan (or other air cooling device such as air conditioner) to ensure air circulation.
3. The air from the fan must not blow directly to the drive unit because this easily causes dust adhesion and further a fault on the drive unit.
4. A vent must be available at bottom of the control cabinet to form bottom-up air flow, which prevents heat island effect on the surface of components or partial thermal conductivity effect.
5. If the fan cannot meet the cooling requirements, install an air conditioner in the cabinet or in the equipment room. Note that the temperature inside the cabinet must not be too low; otherwise, condensation may occur, causing short-circuit of components.
6. For special environment where the temperature is high but cannot be reduced effectively, de-rate the controller during use.
3.1.3 Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Description
■
Terminal Arrangement
The following figure shows terminal arrangement of the NICE3000 new
.
- 35 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 3-3 Terminal arrangement of the NICE3000 new
PRG UP
SET
CN5
CN1
J12
CN9
J5
CN3
J1
CN2
J9
J10
CN12
NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller
CN7
CN4
J7
■
Description of Main Circuit Terminals
The following figure shows main circuit terminal arrangement.
Figure 3-4 Main circuit terminal arrangement
R S
POWER
T
PB
U V
W
MOTOR
- 36 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-5 Wiring of the main circuit
Three-phase power supply
Safety contactor
R S
POWER
T
PB
U V W
MOTOR
(For models of below 37 kW)
Braking resistor
Three-phase AC power supply
Safety contactor
R S
POWER
T
PB
U V W
MOTOR
Jumper bar
Braking unit MDBUN
Braking resistor
(For models of 37 kW and above)
Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals
Terminal
R, S, T
(+), (-)
(+), PB (P)
Terminals for connecting braking resistor
U, V, W
Name
Three-phase power input terminals
Positive and negative terminals of DC bus
Controller output terminals
Description
Provide three-phase power supply.
Connect the external braking unit and energy feedback unit for models of 37 kW and above.
Connect the braking resistor for models of below
37 kW.
Connect the DC reactor for models of 37 kW and above.
At delivery, the (+) and P terminals are shorted with the jumper bar. If you need not connect the
DC reactor, do not remove the jumper bar.
Connect the three-phase motor.
- 37 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Terminal Name
Grounding terminal Must be grounded.
Description
Precautions about wiring of the main circuit terminals are as follows:
1. Select the braking resistor according to the recommended values in the braking resistor selection table.
2. The circuit on the output side must not be short-circuited or grounded.
3. U, V, W cables of the controller must run through the grounding metal pipe and be laid separately or vertically with the control circuit signal cable.
4. If the motor cable is too long, electrical resonance will be generated due to the impact of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or generating higher leakage current, causing the controller to trip in overcurrent protection.
5. The grounding terminal of the main circuit must be tied to the ground reliably with the short and thick PE conductor. The multi-strand copper cable above 4 mm this terminal to the neutral conductor of the power supply.
2
is recommended, and the grounding resistance must be larger than 4 Ω. Do not connect
6. The requirements for the PE conductor are as follows:
־The impedance of the PE conductor/cable must be able to bear the probable maximum short-circuit current when a fault occurs.
־Use a yellow/green cable as the PE conductor.
־Select the size of the PE conductor according to the following table.
Cross-sectional Area of a Phase Conductor (S)
S ≤ 16 mm
2
16 mm
2
< S ≤ 35 mm
2
35 mm 2 < S
Min. Cross-sectional Area of
Protective Conductor (Sp)
S
16 mm
2
S/2
- 38 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
■
Description of Control Circuit Terminals
Table 3-2 Description of control circuit terminals
Mark
CN1
Code
X1 to
X16
X17 to
X24
Terminal Name
DI
DI
Function Description
• Input voltage range: 10–30
VDC
• Input impedance: 4.7 kΩ
• Optocoupler isolation
• Input current limit: 5 mA
Functions set in F5-01 to F5-
24
CN9
Ai/M AI
Used for the analog load cell device
Terminal Arrangement
X10
X11
X12
X13
X15
X16
X5
X6
X7
X8
X1
X2
X3
X4
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
M
Ai
CN1
CN9
CN3
CN2
CN7
CN5
24V/
COM
MOD+/-
CAN+/-
X25 to
X27/
XCM
Y1/M1 to
Y6/M6
CN4 CAN2+/-
DB9 interface
External 24
VDC power supply
RS485 differential signal
CANbus differential signal
Higher-voltage detection terminal
Relay output
24 VDC power supply for the entire board
Standard isolated RS485 communication interface, used for hall call and display
CANbus communication interface, communication with the CTB
Input voltage range: 110
VAC±15%
Safety circuit and door lock circuit, function set in F5-37 to F5-39
Normally-open (NO), maximum current and voltage rating: 5 A, 250 VAC
Function set in F5-26 to F5-
31
CAN2 differential signal
RS232 communication interface
CAN2 communication interface, used for parallel/ group control
Used as the interface for commission software, cell monitoring, RS232/RS485 parallel/group control, and software download for the
MCB and drive board
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
CAN+
CAN-
CN3
X25
X26
X27
CN2
Y1
M1
M2
Y3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
CN7
CN4
CAN2+ CAN2- GND
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
CN5
- 39 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Mark
CN12
J1
J5
J7
Code Terminal Name Function Description
RJ45 interface
Operation panel interface
Used to connect the external operation panel
Optional grounding terminal for AI. The pins marked with
"COM" are connected to the ground.
Used to connect the terminal resistor for the CANbus communication control board; the pins marked with "ON" are connected to the terminal resistor.
Grounding terminal of the control board. If it is shorted, the ground of the control board is connected to the ground of the controller.
Terminal Arrangement
CN12
COM
ON
J1
J5
J7
J12 Interface for connecting the PG card
J12
J9/
J10
Factory reserved. Do not short them randomly. Otherwise, the controller may not work properly.
-
Table 3-3 Description of indicators on the MCB
Mark
COP
HOP
CAN2
232
Terminal Name
CAN1 communication indicator
Modbus communication indicator
Group control communication indicator
Serial communication indicator
X1 to X24 Input signal indicator
Y1 to Y6
Output signal indicator
Function Description
When communication between the MCB and the CTB is normal, this indicator is on (green).
When communication between the MCB and the HCB is normal, this indicator is on (green).
This indicator is steady on (green) when communication for parallel/group control is normal, and blinks when the running in parallel/group mode is normal.
This indicator is on (green) when communication with the host computer or cell/remote monitoring board is normal.
This indicator is on when the external input is active.
This indicator is on when the system output is active.
3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB)
3.2.1 Dimensions and Installation
The car top board (MCTC-CTB) is the elevator car control board of the NICE3000 new following figures show the appearance and structure and installation method of the CTB.
. It consists of 8 DI terminals, 1 AI terminal, and 9 relay output terminals (standard: 7). The
- 40 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-6 Appearance and structure of the CTB
DM C CM B
3 B2 1 BM
CN4
D2 D1 C3 C2 C1 B3 B2 B1
ON OFF
J2
J9
CN5
A1
Φ4.9
CN10
CAN
RESET
CN7
MCTC-CTB
CN8
CN2 CN1 CN6
Ai M
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
CN3
6 X7 X8
Figure 3-7 Installation method of the CTB (unit: mm)
Plastic support not lower than 1 cm
Self-tapping screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Self-tapping screws
4-Φ4.9×30
MCTC-CTB
Fixing backplane
Plastic support higher than 1 cm
152
162 Unit: mm
MCTC-CTB
Car top control box
Vertical installation Horizontal installation
3.2.2 Wiring of CTB Terminals
Table 3-4 Wiring description of CTB terminals
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Terminal
Arrangement
CN2
CN1
+24V/COM
CAN+/
CAN-
+24V/COM
MOD+/
MOD-
External 24 VDC power supply
CANbus communication interface
24 VDC power supply
Modbus communication
24 VDC power supply for the entire CTB
Connecting the MCB for
CANbus communication
24 VDC power supply for the HCB
Connecting the HCB for
Modbus communication
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CN2
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
CN1
- 41 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
CN6
Mark
Ai-M
Terminal Name Function Description
Load cell signal input 0–10 VDC
Terminal
Arrangement
24V
Ai
CN6
CN3
CN4
CN5
P24
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
B1-BM
B2-BM
B3-BM
C1-CM
C2-CM
C3-C3M
D1-DM
D2-DM
A-AM (NC contact)
B-AM (NO contact)
CN7/CN8
24 VDC power supply
Light curtain 1
Light curtain 2
Door open limit 1
Door open limit 2
Door close limit 1
Door close limit 2
Full-load signal
(100%)
Overload signal
(110%)
Door open signal 1
Door close signal 1
Forced door close 1
Door open signal 2
Door close signal 2
Forced door close 2
Up arrival signal
Down arrival signal
Car fan and lamp control
DB9-pin port for communication with the CCB
DI common terminal
DI terminal
1. Photocoupler isolation, unipolarity input
2. Input impedance: 3.3 kΩ
Signals of the CTB are active when there is 24 VDC power supply.
Relay output terminal
Contact drive capacity:
30 VDC, 1 A
Relay output terminal
Contact drive capacity:
250 VAC, 3 A or 30 VDC, 1
A
Connecting the CCB
CN7 mainly used for front door and ordinary calls
CN8 mainly used for back door and disability calls
X2
X3
P24
P24
X6
X8
CN3
A
B
AM
CN5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
CN7/CN8
BM
B1
B2
B3
CM
C1
C2
C3M
C3
DM
D1
D2
CN4
- 42 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Terminal
Arrangement
CN10 RJ45 interface
Connecting the external operation panel
CN10
J2
CAN
RESET
X1 to X8
CTB address jumper in parallel control
CANbus communication indicator
CANbus communication fault indicator
DI indicator
Setting the CTB addresses:
Short OFF or do not connect the terminal for a single elevator.
For the setting in parallel control, see section 5.2.2.
This indicator blinks when communication between the CTB and the MCB is normal, and is steady on when a communication fault occurs.
This indicator blinks and the CANbus communication indicator is steady on when a fault occurs during communication between the
CTB and the MCB.
This indicator is on (green) when the external input is active.
ON OFF
J2
CAN
RESET
X1 X2 X3 X4
X5 X6 X7 X8
A1, B1 to B3, C1 to
C3, D1 to D2
J9
Relay output indicator
Reserved
This indicator is on (green) when the system output is active.
It is factory reserved. Do not short it randomly. Otherwise, the controller may not be used properly.
D2 D1 C3 C2
C1 B3 B2 B1 A1
-
Note
• To prevent external interference on the communication, you are advised to use the shielded twisted pair as communication cables and lay them parallel.
• Connect cables to the terminals according to the terminal marks, and fix the cables.
3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)
As an important interface between users and the control system, the MCTC-HCB receives hall calls and displays the current floor and running direction for the hall. This board can also be used as car display board.
- 43 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Monarch provides many types of display boards. The following part describes only a few common types. If the types available cannot meet your requirements, you can use a parallel-serial conversion board to make the board provided match your own. For any further requirement, contact Monarch.
The common types to be described are listed in the following table.
Table 3-5 Common HCB types
Type Description
HCB-H Dot-matrix display board (red)
HCB-R1 Ultrathin dot-matrix display board (red)
HCB-D2
Ultrathin segment LCD display board (blue background white display)
HCB-U1
HCB-V1
4.3-inch segment LCD display board (blue background white display)
6.4-inch segment LCD display board (blue background white display)
Size (mm)
144 x 70 x 18
144 x 70 x 10
144 x 70 x 10
143.5 x 79.2 x 9.4
131 x 184.6 x 14.2
3.3.1 HCB-H (Dot-Matrix Display Board)
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-H.
Figure 3-8 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-H
22.9
4-
Φ
4.2
MCTC-HCB-H
JP1
JP3
UP
S1
34.3
56.0
70.0
CN1
JP2
JP4
DOWN
Unit: mm
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-H.
- 44 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-9 Installation method of HCB-H
Self-tapping screw
4-
Φ
4.9x30
Plastic support higher than 1 cm
Dot-matrix display board
HCB-H
9.9
22.5
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-H.
Table 3-6 Input and output terminals of HCB-H
Terminal
Name
Function Terminal Wiring
Up arrival indicator
JP1
Interface for the elevator lock switch and up arrival indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input.
Pins 1 and 4 are output of the up arrival indicator (24
VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Elevator lock switch input
1 2 3 4
Down arrival indicator
JP2
Interface for the fire emergency switch and down arrival indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input.
Pins 1 and 4 are output of the down arrival indicator
(24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Fire emergency switch input
1 2 3 4
Up call indicator
JP3
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Up call button
1 2 3 4
- 45 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Terminal
Name
Function
JP4
S1
CN1
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Button for setting the floor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the floor address
(range 0–56). After you stop pressing, the address number blinks three times and the setting is successful.
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.
3.3.2 HCB-R1 (Ultrathin Dot-Matrix Display Board)
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1.
Figure 3-10 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1
Terminal Wiring
Down call indicator
Down call button
1 2 3 4
S1
1 2 3 4
4-Φ3.5
22.8
MCTC-HCB-R1
CN1
56.0
J1
UP DOWNST XF
70
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-R1.
Unit: mm
- 46 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-11 Installation method of HCB-R1
Self-tapping screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Plastic support higher than 1 cm
Ultrathin dotmatrix display board
HCB-R1
10
6.7
The following table describes the input and output terminals.
Table 3-7 Input and output terminals of HCB-R1
Terminal
Name
UP
DOWN
XF/ST
J1
CN1
Function Terminal Wiring
Up call indicator
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator
(24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Up call button
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock switches
Pins 1 and 2 are for fire emergency input.
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.
Terminal for setting the floor address.
Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button to set the floor address (range 0–56). After the jumper cap is removed, the address is automatically stored.
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.
Elevator lock input
1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Down call button
J1
1 2 3 4
Fire emergency input
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
- 47 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
3.3.3 HCB-D2 (Ultrathin Segment LCD Display Board)
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2.
Figure 3-12 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2
4-
Φ
3.5
49
CN1
J1
56.0
UP DOWN ST XF
70.0
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-D2.
Figure 3-13 Installation method of HCB-D2
Unit: mm
4-
Screw
Φ
4.9x30
Plastic support higher than 1 cm
HCB-D2
10
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-D2.
- 48 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Table 3-8 Input and output terminals of HCB-D2
Terminal
Name
Function
UP
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
DOWN
XF/ST
J1
CN1
Terminal Wiring
Up call indicator
Up call button
1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Down call button
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock switch
Pins 1 and 2 are for fire emergency input.
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.
Terminal for setting the floor address
Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button to set the floor address (range 0–56).
After the jumper cap is removed, the address is automatically stored.
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for power supply.
Elevator lock input
1 2 3 4
J1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Fire emergency input
- 49 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
3.3.4 HCB-U1 (4.3-inch Segment LCD Display Board)
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1.
Figure 3-14 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1
Φ
4.5
53.0
3-5.5
60.0
79.2
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-U1.
Figure 3-15 Installation method of HCB-U1
Self-tapping screw
4-
Φ
4.9x30
Plastic support higher than 1 cm
Unit: mm
HCB-U1
15
9.4
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-U1.
- 50 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Table 3-9 Input and output terminals of HCB-U1
Terminal
Name
Function
J1
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
J2
J3
S1
CN1
Terminal Wiring
Up call indicator
Up call button
1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Down call button
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock switches
Pins 1 and 2 are for fire emergency input.
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.
Button for setting the floor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the floor address (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, the address number blinks three times, and therefore the setting is successful.
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.
Elevator lock input
1 2 3 4
Fire emergency input
1 2 3 4
S1
1 2 3 4
- 51 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
3.3.5 HCB-V1 (6.4-inch Segment LCD Display Board)
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1.
Figure 3-16 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1
Φ4.5
105
95
Unit: mm
131
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-V1.
Figure 3-17 Installation method of HCB-V1
Self-tapping screw
4-Φ4.9x30
HCB-V1
14.2
17.9
- 52 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-V1.
Table 3-10 Input and output terminals of HCB-V1
Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring
Up call indicator
J1
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
Up call button
1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
J2
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input.
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity:
40 mA).
Down call button
1 2 3 4
J3
S1
CN1
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock switch
Pins 1 and 2 are for fire emergency input.
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.
Button for setting the floor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the floor address (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, the address number blinks three times, and therefore the setting is successful.
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.
Elevator lock input
1 2 3 4
S1
Fire emergency input
1 2 3 4
3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB)
The car call board (MCTC-CCB) is another interface between users and the control system. Each CCB comprises 24 inputs and 22 outputs, including 16 floor buttons and 8 functional signals. The CCB mainly collects button calls and outputs signals of the button call indicators. The need for 31-floor use can be implemented through cascaded connection.
CN2 is an input connector and CN1 is a cascaded output connector.
- 53 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of the CCB.
Figure 3-18 Appearance and dimensions of the CCB
79 mm
69 mm
CN2
Buzzer
MCTC-CCB
JP1
1 2 3 4
Floor 1
JP2
1 2 3 4
Floor 2
JP3 JP4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Floor 3 Floor 4
JP5
1 2 3 4
Floor 5
JP6
1 2 3 4
Floor 6
JP7 JP8
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Floor 7 Floor 8
JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Floor 9 Floor 10 Floor 11 Floor 12
JP13
1 2 3 4
JP14
1 2 3 4
JP15
1 2 3 4
JP16
1 2 3 4
Floor 13 Floor 14 Floor 15 Floor 16
JP17
1 2 3 4
Door open
JP21
JP18
1 2 3 4
Door close
JP22
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 change
CN1
JP19
1 2 3 4
Door open delay
JP23
JP20
1 2 3 4
Bypass
JP24
1 2 3 4
Independent running
1 2 3 4
R2.5
Fire emergency
The following figure shows the installation method of the CCB.
Figure 3-19 Installation method of the CCB
Self-tapping screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Plastic support higher than 1 cm
MCTC-CCB
- 54 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
The following table describes the input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB.
Table 3-11 Input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB
No.
Interface
1 JP1
2
3
4
5
JP2
JP3
JP4
JP5
Pins 2 and 3
Floor 1 button input
Floor 2 button input
Floor 3 button input
Floor 4 button input
Floor 5 button input
Pins 1 and 4
Floor 1 display output
Floor 2 display output
Floor 3 display output
Floor 4 display output
Floor 5 display output
Remarks
Floor button indicator
6
7
8
9
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
Floor 6 button input
Floor 7 button input
Floor 8 button input
Floor 9 button input
Floor 6 display output
Floor 7 display output
Floor 8 display output
Floor 9 display output
Floor button
Floor 10 button input
Floor 11 button input
Floor 12 button input
Floor 13 button input
Floor 10 display output
Floor 11 display output
Floor 12 display output
Floor 13 display output
1 2 3 4
10
11
12
13
JP10
JP11
JP12
JP13
For CCB2 (second
MCTC-CCB), the input signal of JPn corresponds to floor
(16+n) button input.
14
15
16
17
18
JP14
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
Floor 14 button input
Floor 15 button input
Floor 16 button input
Floor 14 display output
Floor 15 display output
Floor 16 display output
Door open button input Door open display output
19
20
JP19
JP20
Door close button input Door close display output
Door open delay button input
Door open delay display output
Direct travel ride input
Attendant input
Non-door zone stop output
Reserved
Direction change input Reserved
Invalid for CCB2.
21
22
JP21
JP22
23
24
JP23
JP24
Independent running input
Fire emergency input
Reserved
Reserved
Note: Pins 1 and 2 are positive of power supply. The pin with white dot mark or that is rectangular is pin 1.
Note
• Perform wiring strictly according to the terminal marks and ensure that the button is inserted securely.
• The MCTC-CCB has the same interfaces on both ends, and do not make wrong connection when connecting multiple boards in series.
- 55 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card
The NICE3000 new
can implement CLVC only with use of the MCTC-PG card. The following figures show the appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller.
Directly insert the J1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card into the J12 terminal of the controller.
Figure 3-20 Appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller
PRG UP
SET
J12
J1
MCTC-PG card
CN1
NICE3000 new series integrated elevator controller
3.5.1 Selection of the MCTC-PG Card
Monarch provides four PG card models, MCTC-PG-A2, MCTC-PG-D, MCTC-PG-E and
MCTC-PG-F1 for different encoder types, as described in the following table.
Table 3-12 Selection of the MCTC-PG card models
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance
• Push-pull encoder
• Open-collector incremental encoder
MCTC-PG-A2
12V
PGM
PGA
PGB
CN1
MCTC-PG-A2
J1
UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D
CN1
MCTC-PG-D
D2
D5
D8
D11
D14
CN2
M AI
J1
- 56 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance
SIN/COS encoder MCTC-PG-E
CN1
MCTC-PG-E
J1
Absolute encoder
(ECN413/1313)
MCTC-PG-F1
CN1
MCTC-PG-F1
J1
3.5.2 Terminal Wiring and Description of the MCTC-PG Card
The MCTC-PG card is connected to the controller and the encoder as follows:
The J1 terminal and CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card are respectively connected to the
J12 terminal of the MCB on the controller and the encoder of the motor.
Different MCTC-PG card models are connected to the MCB in the same way. The connection method to the encoder depends on the CN1 terminal of the model.
The following figure shows the wiring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller.
Figure 3-21 Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller
Braking resistor
Safety contactor
Three-phase AC power supply
R
S
T
+
– PB
U
V
W
Motor Encoder
M
NICE3000 new
J1
MCTC-PG-E
CN1
PG card
The following table defines the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models.
Table 3-13 Definitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models
MCTC-PG-A2
1
MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1
15V 1 A+ 6 NC 11 W+ 1 B- 6 A11 C- 1 B- 6 A11 CLK-
2
3
PGM 2 A- 7 U+ 12 W- 2 NC 7 COM 12 D+ 2 NC 7 GND 12 DATA+
PGA 3 B+ 8 U- 13 VCC 3 Z+ 8 B+ 13 D- 3 NC 8 B+ 13 DATA-
- 57 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
MCTC-PG-A2
4
MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E
PGB 4 B- 9 V+ 14 COM 4 Z- 9 VCC 14 NC 4 NC 9
MCTC-PG-F1
5V
(Up) 14
5 NC 10 V- 15 NC 5 A+ 10 C+ 15 NC 5 A+ 10 CLK+ 15
NC
5V
(Sensor)
12V
PGM
PGA
PGB
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
3
4
1
2
5
9
10
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN1
CN1 CN1
3.5.3 Precautions on Connecting the MCTC-PG Card
1. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be separated from the cables of the control circuit and the power circuit. Parallel cabling in close distance is forbidden.
2. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be a shielded cable. The shield must be connected to the PE on the controller side. To minimize interference, single-end grounding is suggested.
3. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must run through the duct separately and the metal shell is reliably grounded.
3.5.4 Selection of Adaptable Motor
The main counters of the electrical relationship between the controller and the motor are voltage and current.
1. In general elevator applications, the input mains voltage is 380 V, and the motor voltage can only be equal to or smaller than 380 V. Thus, when selecting the NICE3000 can take only the current of the motor into consideration.
new
, you
2. When the NICE3000 new
is designed, large safety allowance is reserved for the main power module. The controller can run properly within the nominal output current. During stable running, the maximum output torque is 150% of the rated torque and can reach up to 200% of the rated torque for a short time.
Therefore, for the motor with the rated voltage of 380 V, you can select the controller of the same power class. As long as the rated current of the motor is smaller than the output current of the controller, the controller of the same power class can also be used.
Generally speaking, select an adaptable motor based on the output current of the controller, and ensure that the rated current of the motor is equal to or smaller than the output current of the controller. For technical specifications of the controller, see section 2.3.
- 58 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
3.6.1 Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices
1. Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge suppressor.
2. Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an antiinterference filter to minimize the interference.
3. Select the peripheral devices based on actual applications as well as by referring to section 3.6.2.
The following table describes the peripheral electrical devices.
Table 3-14 Description of peripheral electrical devices
Part
MCCB
Safety contactor
AC input reactor
AC output reactor
Mounting Location
Forefront of controller power input side
Between MCCB and the controller input side
Controller input side
Between the controller output side and the motor, close to the controller
Function Description
Cut off the power supply of the controller and provide short-circuit protection.
Apply/Cut off the power supply of the controller.
The close/open of the contactor is controlled by the external safety circuit.
Improve the power factor of the input side.
Eliminate the higher harmonics on the input side to provide effective protection on the rectifier bridge.
Eliminate the input current unbalance due to unbalance between the power phases.
If the distance between the controller and the motor is greater than 100 m, install an AC output reactor.
3.6.2 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
Proper cable specification and cabling greatly improves anti-interference capability and safety of the system, facilitating installation and commissioning and enhancing system running stability.
The following table describes the specifications of peripheral electrical devices for selection.
Table 3-15 Specification of peripheral electrical devices for selection
Grounding
Cable (mm²)
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
MCCB
(A)
Contactor
(A)
Cable of Main
Circuit (mm²)
Cable of Control
Circuit (mm²)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%, 50/60 Hz
16
20
25
12
18
18
1
2.5
4
0.75
0.75
0.75
1
2.5
4
- 59 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
Controller Model
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
NICE-L-C-4011
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045
NICE-L-C-4055
NICE-L-C-4075
NICE-L-C-4090
NICE-L-C-4110
NICE-L-C-4132
NICE-L-C-4160
65
80
95
115
170
205
245
300
300
25
32
38
40
50
9
12
18
100
100
125
160
225
250
315
350
400
32
40
50
63
80
10
16
25
MCCB
(A)
40
50
50
Contactor
(A)
25
32
38
Cable of Main
Circuit (mm²)
6
6
6
Cable of Control
Circuit (mm²)
0.75
0.75
0.75
63
80
50
65
10
16
0.75
0.75
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%, 50/60 Hz
16
25
32
40
12
18
25
32
1.5
2.5
4
6
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
50
63
80
100
38
40
50
65
6
10
10
16
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%, 50/60 Hz
0.75
1.5
2.5
4
6
6
10
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
120
150
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
Grounding
Cable (mm²)
6
6
6
10
16
6
10
10
16
1.5
2.5
4
6
25
35
50
60
16
16
16
60
75
0.75
1.5
2.5
6
10
4
6
10
Note
To prevent the strong power from interfering with the weak power, the strong-power cables must be separated from the weak-power cables during cabling in the shaft. Grounding cables must be used to separate strong-power and weak-power traveling cables. "Strong power" refers to the voltage of 36 V and above.
- 60 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000
new
Control System
Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000 new
control system
See the last page of this chapter.
3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals
In elevator control, to implement landing accurately and running safely, the car position needs to be identified based on shaft position signals.
These shaft position signals include the leveling switches, up/down slow-down switches, up/ down limit switches, and up/down final limit switches.
These shaft position signals are directly transmitted by the shaft cables to the MCB of the controller. For the electrical wiring method, refer to Figure 3-22.
The following figure shows the arrangement of shaft position signals in the shaft.
Figure 3-23 Arrangement of shaft position signals
Up final limit switch
Up limit switch
Top leveling position
150 mm
30-50 mm
L L >
V²
2 x F3-08
(V: Rated elevator speed)
Up slow-down switch
D
Leveling plate
(floor N)
80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm
Down slow-down switch
L L >
V²
2 x F3-08
(V: Rated elevator speed)
Bottom leveling position
Down limit switch
150 mm
30─50 mm
Down final limit switch
- 61 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
3.8.1 Installation of Leveling Signals
Leveling signals comprise the leveling switch and leveling plate and are directly connected to the input terminal of the controller. It is used to enable the car to land at each floor accurately.
The leveling switches are generally installed on the top of the car. The NICE3000 new
system supports the installation of 1−3 leveling switches. The leveling plate is installed on the guide rail in the shaft. A leveling plate needs to be installed at each floor. Ensure that leveling plates at all floors are mounted with the same depth and verticality.
The following figure shows the installation of leveling signals
Figure 3-24 Installation of leveling signals
Leveling switch
Up leveling signal detection
Door zone signal detection
Down leveling signal detection
Car
The following table describes the installation requirements of leveling switches
Table 3-16 Installation requirements of leveling switches
Number of
Leveling
Switches
Installation Method
Connecting to Input Terminals of
Controller
Setting of
Function Code
1
Door zone signal detection
Door zone signal
+24 VDC
Door zone signal
+24 VDC
X1
X2
X3
F5-01 = 0
F5-02 = 35 (NC)
F5-03 = 0
F5-01 = 0
F5-02 = 03 (NO)
F5-03 = 0
- 62 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Number of
Leveling
Switches
Installation Method
2
3
Up leveling signal detection
Down leveling signal detection
Up leveling signal detection
Door zone signal detection
Down leveling signal detection
Connecting to Input Terminals of
Controller
+24 VDC
Up leveling
Down leveling
X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC
Up leveling
Down leveling
X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC
Up leveling
Door zone signal
Down leveling
X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC
Up leveling
Door zone signal
Down leveling
X1
X2
X3
Setting of
Function Code
F5-01 = 33 (NC)
F5-02 = 0
F5-03 = 34 (NC)
F5-01 = 01 (NO)
F5-02 = 0
F5-03 = 02 (NO)
F5-01 = 33 (NC)
F5-02 = 35 (NC)
F5-03 = 34 (NC)
F5-01 = 01 (NO)
F5-02 = 03 (NO)
F5-03 = 02 (NO)
Note
• When installing leveling plates, ensure that the plates at all floors are mounted with the same depth and verticality. Otherwise, the leveling accuracy will be affected. The recommended length of the plate is 80–200 mm.
• More leveling input signals need to be added if the door pre-open function is used. In this case, you need to increase the length of the plate properly. For details on the door pre-open module, contact the local agent or Monarch.
3.8.2 Installation of Slow-Down Switches
The slow-down switch is one of the key protective components of the NICE3000 maximum speed when the elevator position becomes abnormal.
new
, protecting the elevator from over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal at
The NICE3000 new
system supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-down switches. The slow-down switch 1, slow-down switch 2 and slow-down switch 3 are installed from the two ends of the shaft to the middle floor one by one. Generally, only one pair of slow-down switches is required for the low-speed elevator. Two or three pairs of slow-down switches are required for the high-speed elevator.
The slow-down distance L indicates the distance from the slow-down switch to the leveling plate at the terminal floor. The calculating formula is as follows:
L >
V²
2 x F3-08
In the formula, "L" indicates the slow-down distance, "V" indicates the F0-04 (Rated elevator
- 63 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
speed), and "F3-08" indicates the special deceleration rate.
The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.9 m/s
2
. The slow-down distances calculated based on different rated elevator speeds are listed in the following table:
Table 3-17 Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds
Rated Elevator
Speed (m/s)
0.25 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.75
1 1.5 1.6 1.75
Distance of
Slow-down 1 (m) 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.5 1.7 2.0
2 2.5
3 3.5
4
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Distance of
Slow-down 2 (m)
Distance of
Slow-down 3 (m)
None
None
2.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
6 8 11
"V" indicates the elevator speed, and precautions on the actual installation distance are as follows:
• V < 1 m/s: The actual installation distances of the slow-down switches should be close to the values recommended in this table.
• 1 m/s ≤ V ≤ 2 m/s: The actual installation distances of the slow-down switches are allowed to have an error within ±0.1 m based on the values recommended in this table.
• 2 m/s < V ≤ 4 m/s: The actual installation distances of the slow-down switches are allowed to have an error within ±0.3 m based on the values recommended in this table.
Note
• The slow-down distances above are calculated on the basis of the default values (special deceleration rate 0.9 m/s
2
, and acceleration rate and deceleration rate 0.6 m/s
2
).
• Increasing the acceleration rate and deceleration rate or reducing the special deceleration rate may bring safety hazard. If any change is in need, re-calculate the slow-down distance by using the above formula.
3.8.3 Installation of Limit Switches
The up limit switch and down limit switch protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when the elevator does not stop at the leveling position of the terminal floor.
• The up limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the top leveling position.
The limit switch acts when the car continues to run upward 30−50 mm from the top leveling position.
• The down limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the bottom leveling position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run downward 30−50 mm from the bottom leveling position.
- 64 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.8.4 Installation of Final Limit Switches
The final limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when the elevator does not stop completely upon passing the up/down limit switch.
• The up final limit switch is mounted above the up limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away from the top leveling position.
• The down final limit switch is mounted below the down limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away from the bottom leveling position.
- 65 -
NICE3000 new
User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000 new
control sy stem
Braking resistor
Safety contactor
Three-phase supply
R
S
T
+
– PB
PRG UP SET
CN5
U
V
W
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
Hz
RPM
A
%
V
ENTER PRG
QUICK
RUN MF.K
STOP
RES
Up leveling
Door zone
Down leveling
Safety circuit feedback
Door lock circuit feedback
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
+24 VDC
Inspection circuit
Up limit
Down limit
Up slow-down switch 1
Down slow-down switch 1
Up slow-down switch 2
Down slow-down switch 2
Up slow-down switch 3
Down slow-down switch 3
Inspection circuit
CN12
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
CN1
Inspection signal
Inspection up
Inspection down
J12
PG card
MCTC-PG
NICE3000 new
CN3
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
CAN+
CAN-
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
Ai
X25
X26
X27
XCOM
CN9
CN2
CAN2+
CAN2-
GND
CN4
CN7
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
M6
K1
K1
K2
Encoder
Shield
Motor
M
Braking mechanism
K2
Top floor
CN1
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
MCTC-HCB
CAN+
CAN-
COM
Traveling cable
CN2
A
AM analog load cell device
Ai
M
CN5
CN6
CN10
MCTC-CTB
CN3
X2
X3
X4
P24
X6
X8
CN7
CN1
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
CN8
CN4
BM
B1
B2
B3
CM
C1
C2
C3M
C3
DM
D1
D2
A B
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
Door 1 light curtain
Door 2 open limit
Door 1 close limit
Door 2 close limit
Full-load signal
Overload signal
MCTC-CTB
J1
J2
J3
Control of front door machine
Control of back door machine
Arrival gong
CN1
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
+24 VDC
Emergency electric operation
1 2
3 4
Inspection common Up
1 2 1 2
3 4
Up
1 2
1 2
Down
5 6
1 2
Down
5 6
X9 Inspection signal
X10
Inspection up
X11 Inspection down
Short shaft safety switches
MCTC-HCB
CN2
CN2
Bottom floor
MCTC-CCB MCTC-CCB
Note:
1. The functions of I/O terminals of the controller are set in group F5. The wiring in this figure uses the default setting.
2. The cables for connecting the MCTC-CCB are provided by Monarch and the model is
MCTC-CCL. Specify it in your order.
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
CN1
CN1
MCTC-HCB
Cascaded connection
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual
- 66 -
4
Use of the
Commissioning Tools
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools
The NICE3000 new
supports three commissioning tools, 3-button keypad on the MCB, LED operation panel, and host computer monitoring software.
Tool
Onboard 3-button keypad
LED operation panel
Host computer monitoring software
Function Description
It is used to enter the shaft commissioning commands and view floor information.
It is used to view and modify parameters related to elevator drive and control.
It is used to monitor the current elevator state, view and modify all parameters, and upload and download parameters on the PC.
Remark
Standard
Optional
Optional
The following part describes the commonly used keypad and LED operation panel in detail.
4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad
The onboard keypad consists of three 7-segment LEDs and three buttons. You can view information about the controller and enter simple commands on the keypad.
Note
The keypad is exposed, and pay attentions to the following points during use:
1. Wear insulated gloves when performing operations on the keypad to prevent electric shock or damage to the controller components due to electrostatic discharge.
2. Do not use a metal or sharp tool to press the button to prevent the short-circuit fault or damage to the components on the MCB.
The following figure shows the appearance of the keypad.
Figure 4-1 Appearance of the keypad
PRG UP SET
F
E
A
G
B
D
C
DP
As shown in the preceding figure, the three buttons are PRG, UP, and SET. The functions of the three buttons are as follows:
• PRG: Press this button in any state to display the current function group number.
You can press the UP button to change the function group number.
• UP: Press this button to increase the function group number.
Currently, the MCB defines a total of 13 function code groups, namely, F0 to F9, and
FA to FC. You can press the UP button to display them in turn. In addition, in special
- 68 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the Commissioning Tools
function code group menu, you can input simple references by using the UP button.
• SET: In the function code group menu, press this button to enter the menu of the function code group.
In special function code group menu, after you input a simple reference and press this button to save the setting, the display will return to the F0 menu by default.
The following figure shows the setting of increasing the called floor to 5.
Figure 4-2 Setting the called floor
Current floor
(default display)
01
Level-I menu
(Select the function code group)
PRG
Switch
F0
UP
Increase
Level-II menu
(Set the parameter value)
F1
PRG
Without saving
When there is a blinking digit, press the UP button to modify it.
SET
Enter
04
UP
Increase
05 SET
Saving
The function code groups displayed on the keypad are described as follows:
1. F0: display of floor and running direction
The F0 menu is displayed on the keypad by default upon power-on. The first 7-segment
LED indicates the running direction, while the last two 7-segment LEDs indicate the current floor number of the elevator.
When the elevator stops, the first 7-segment LED has no display. When the elevator runs, the first 7-segment LED blinks to indicate the running direction.
When a system fault occurs, the 7-segment LEDs automatically display the fault code and blink. If the fault is reset automatically, the F0 menu is displayed.
2. F1: command input of the running floor
After you enter the F1 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the bottom floor (F6-01). You can press the UP button to set the destination floor within the range of lowest to top and then press the SET button to save the setting. The elevator runs to the destination floor, and the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu at the same time.
3. F2: fault reset and fault code display
After you enter the F2 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can press the UP button to change the setting to 1 or 2.
־Display "1": If you select this value and press the SET button, the system fault is reset.
Then, the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu.
־Display "2": If you select this value and press the SET button, the 7-segment LEDs display the 11 fault codes and occurrence time circularly. You can press the PRG button to exit.
4. F3: time display
After you enter the F3 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the current system time circularly.
- 69 -
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE3000 new User Manual
5. F4: contract number display
After you enter the F4 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the user’s contract number.
6. F5: running times display
After you enter the F5 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the elevator running times circularly.
7. F6: door open/close control
After you enter the F6 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "1-1", and the UP and SET buttons respectively stand for the door open button and door close button. You can press the PRG button to exit.
8. F7: shaft auto-tuning command input
After you enter the F7 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can select 0 or 1 here, where "1" indicates the shaft auto-tuning command available.
After you select "1" and press the SET button, shaft auto-tuning is implemented if the conditions are met. Meanwhile, the display switches over to the F0 menu. After shaft auto-tuning is complete, F7 is back to "0" automatically. If shaft auto-tuning conditions are not met, fault code "Err35" is displayed.
9. F8: test function
After you enter the F8 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting of F8 is described as follows:
־1: Hall call forbidden
־2: Door open forbidden
־3: Overload forbidden
־4: Limit switches disabled
־6: Entering slip experiment state
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display
"Err88" and blink, prompting that the elevator is being tested. When you press PRG to exit, F8 is back to 0 automatically.
10. F9: reserved
11. FA: auto-tuning
After you enter the FA menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of FA is
1 and 2, as follows:
־1: With-load auto-tuning
־2: No-load auto-tuning
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display
"TUNE", and the elevator enters the auto-tuning state. After confirming that the elevator meets the safe running conditions, press the SET button again to start auto-tuning.
After auto-tuning is complete, the 7-segment LEDs display the current angle for 2s, and then switch over to the F0 menu.
- 70 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the Commissioning Tools
You can press the PRG button to exit the auto-tuning state.
12. Fb: CTB state display
After you enter the Fb menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the input/output state of the
CTB. The following table describes the meaning of each segment of the LEDs.
Table 4-1 Input/Output state of the CTB
LED
No.
1
2
3
D
E
F
G
DP
Segment
Mark
A
A
B
A
F
G
DP
B
C
D
E
C
Meaning of
Segment
Meaning of ON
Light curtain 1 Light curtain 1 input active
Light curtain 2 Light curtain 2 input active
Door open limit 1 Door open limit 1 input active
Door open limit 2 Door open limit 2 input active
Door close limit 1 Door close limit 1 input active
Door close limit 2 Door close limit 2 input active
Full-load Full-load input active
Overload Overload input active
Light-load
Door open 1
Door close 1
Forced door close 1
Door open 2
Door close 2
Forced door close 2
Up arrival gong
Down arrival gong
Light-load signal active
Door open 1 relay output
Door close 1 relay output
Forced door close 1 relay output
Door open 2 relay output
Door close 2 relay output
Forced door close 2 relay output
Up arrival gong relay output
Down arrival gong relay output
E
F
Diagram
A
G
B
D
C
DP
13. FC: elevator direction change (same as the function of F2-10)
־0: Direction unchanged
־1: Direction reversed
4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel
The LED operation panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the controller by using an
8-core flat cable. You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status and start or stop the controller by operating the operation panel. The following figure shows the LED operation panel.
- 71 -
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 4-3 Diagram of the LED operation panel
Function indicator
Data display
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
Programming key
Menu key
RUN key
Hz
RPM
A
%
V
PRG ENTER
QUICK
RUN MF.K
STOP
RES
Unit indicator
Increment key
Confirm key
Shift key
Decrement key
Stop/Reset key
Fault hiding key
4.2.1 Description of Indicators
■
RUN
ON indicates that the controller is in the running state, and OFF indicates that the controller is in the stop state.
■
LOCAL/REMOT
Reserved.
■
FWD/REV
ON indicates up direction of the elevator, and OFF indicates down direction of the elevator.
■
TUNE/TC
ON indicates the auto-tuning state.
■
Unit Indicators
means that the indicator is ON, and means that the indicator is OFF.
Hz
RPM
A
Hz
RPM
A
%
V
Hz: unit of frequency
%
V
A: unit of current
Hz
RPM
A
%
V
V: unit of voltage
Hz
RPM
A
Hz
RPM
A
%
%
V
RPM: unit of rotational speed
V
%: percentage
- 72 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the Commissioning Tools
4.2.2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel
Table 4-2 Description of keys on the operation panel
Key
PRG
Name
Programming
Function
Enter or exit Level-I menu.
ENTER
Confirm
Increment
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the parameter setting.
Increase data or function code.
RUN
Decrement
Shift
Run
Decrease data or function code.
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or running state, and select the digit to be modified when modifying parameters.
Start the controller in the operation panel control mode.
STOP
RES
QUICK
Stop/Reset
Quick
Stop the controller when it is in the running state and perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state.
Enter or exit Level-I quick menu.
MF.K
Fault hiding
Press this key to display or hide the fault information in the fault state, which facilitates parameter viewing.
4.2.3 Operation Procedure
The LED operation panel adopts three-level menu.
The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-4 Operation procedure on the operation panel
Status parameter
(default display)
0.000
Level-I menu
If there is a blinking digit, press
/ / to modify the digit.
PRG
F0
ENTER
PRG
Level-II menu function code)
PRG
Level-III menu
(Set the value of
F0.06
ENTER
PRG
Not to save the setting
50.00
ENTER
F0.07
ENTER
- 73 -
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE3000 new User Manual
You can return to Level II menu from Level III menu by pressing
PRG
or
ENTER
. The difference between the two is as follows:
• After you press
ENTER
, the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code.
• After you press
PRG
, the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly returns to Level II menu and remains at the current function code.
The following figure shows the shift between the three levels of menus.
Figure 4-5 Shift between the three levels of menus
ENTER
PRG
Fd
FE
FP
F0
…
FX-00
F1
F2
F3
Fd-00
FE-00
FP-00 F0-00 F1-00 F2-00
F3-00
Fd-26
FE-56 FP-02 F0-07 F1-25 F2-18 F3-21
In Level III menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot be modified. This may be because:
• Such a parameter is only readable, such as actually detected parameters and running record parameters.
• Such a parameter cannot be modified in the running state and can only be changed at stop.
4.2.4 Viewing Status Parameters
In the stop or running state, the operation panel can display multiple status parameters.
Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the equivalent binary bits converted from the values of FA-01 and FA-02.
In the stop state, a total of 12 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing . You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-02 (each of the binary bits converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
- 74 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the Commissioning Tools
Figure 4-6 Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state
Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state
-down distance at rated speed
In the running state, a total of 16 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing . You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-01 (each of the binary bits converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
Figure 4-7 Shift between parameters displayed in the running state
Shift between parameters displayed in the running state
For details, see the description of corresponding parameters in Chapter 7.
- 75 -
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE3000 new User Manual
- 76 -
5
System Commissioning and Application Example
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example
5.1 System Commissioning
CAUTION
• Ensure that there is no person in the shaft or car before performing commissioning on the elevator.
• Ensure that the peripheral circuit and mechanical installation are ready before performing commissioning.
The following figure shows the commissioning procedure of the system.
Figure 5-1 Commissioning procedure of the system
Start
Check the peripheral circuit
Check the encoder
Set related parameters of the elevator
Perform motor autotuning
Perform trial inspection running
Perform shaft autotuning
Perform load cell autotuning
Commission the door machine controller
Perform trial normalspeed running
Check the leveling accuracy
Perform riding comfort commissioning
Perform function commissioning
End
5.1.1 Check Before Commissioning
The elevator needs to be commissioned after being installed; the correct commissioning guarantees safe and normal running of the elevator. Before performing electric commissioning, check whether the electrical part and mechanical part are ready for commissioning to ensure safety.
At least two persons need to be onsite during commissioning so that the power supply can be cut off immediately when an abnormality occurs.
- 78 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
1. Check the field mechanical and electric wiring.
Before power-on, check the peripheral wiring to ensure component and personal safety.
The items to be checked include:
1) Whether the component models are matched
2) Whether the safety circuit is conducted and reliable
3) Whether the door lock circuit is conducted and reliable
4) Whether the shaft is unobstructed, and the car has no passenger and meets the conditions for safe running
5) Whether the cabinet and traction motor are well grounded
6) Whether the peripheral circuit is correctly wired according to the drawings of the vendor
7) Whether all switches act reliably
8) Whether there is short-circuit to ground by checking the inter-phase resistance of the main circuit
9) Whether the elevator is set to the inspection state
10) Whether the mechanical installation is complete (otherwise, it will result in equipment damage and personal injury)
2. Check the encoder.
The pulse signal from the encoder is critical to accurate control of the system. Before commissioning, check the following items carefully:
1) The encoder is installed reliably with correct wiring. For details on the encoder wiring, see section 3.5.
2) The signal cable and strong-current circuit of the encoder are laid in different ducts to prevent interference.
3) The encoder cable is preferably directly connected to the control cabinet. If the cable is not long enough and an extension cable is required, the extension cable must be a shielding cable and preferably welded to the original encoder cable by using the soldering iron.
4) The shielding cable of the encoder cable is grounded on the end connected to the controller (only one end is grounded to prevent interference).
3. Check the power supply before power-on.
1) The inter-phase voltage of the user power supply is within (380 V±15%), and the unbalance degree does not exceed 3%.
2) The power input voltage between terminals 24V and COM on the MCB is within (24
VDC±15%).
3) The total lead-in wire gauge and total switch capacity meet the requirements.
Note
If the input voltage exceeds the allowable value, serious damage will be caused. Distinguish the negative and positive of the DC power supply. Do not run the system when there is input power phase loss.
- 79 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
4. Check the grounding.
1) Check that the resistance between the following points and the ground is close to infinity.
־R, S, T and PE
־U, V, W and PE
־24V and PE on the MCB
־Motor U, V, W and PE
־+, – bus terminals and PE
־Safety circuit, door lock circuit, and inspection circuit terminals and PE
2) Check the grounding terminals of all elevator electrical components and the power supply of the control cabinet
5.1.2 Setting and Auto-tuning of Motor Parameters
The NICE3000 new
supports two major control modes, sensorless vector control (SVC) and closed-loop vector control (CLVC). SVC is applicable to inspection speed running for commissioning and fault judgment running during maintenance of the asynchronous motor.
CLVC is applicable to normal elevator running. In CLVC mode, good driving performance and running efficiency can be achieved in the prerequisite of correct motor parameters.
■
Motor Parameters to Be Set
The motor parameters that need to be set are listed in the following table.
Table 5-1 Motor parameters to be set
Function Code
F1-25
F1-00
F1-12
F1-01 to F1-05
F0-00
Parameter Name
Motor type
Encoder type
Description
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental encoder
Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000
Rated motor power
Rated motor voltage
Rated motor current
Rated motor frequency
Rated motor rotational speed
These parameters are model dependent, and you need to manually input them according to the nameplate.
Control mode
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
- 80 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
Function Code
F0-01
F1-11
Parameter Name
Command source selection
Auto-tuning mode
Description
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
■
Precautions for Motor Auto-tuning
Follow the following precautions:
• Ensure that all wiring and installation meet the safety specifications.
• Ensure that the motor wiring is correct (UVW cables of the motor respectively connected to UVW cables of the controller) for with-load auto-tuning. If the motor wiring is incorrect, the motor may jitter or fail to run after the brake is released; in this case, you need to replace any two of the motor UVW cables.
• Reset the current fault and then start auto-tuning, because the system cannot enter the auto-tuning state ("TUNE" is not displayed) when there is a fault.
• Perform motor auto-tuning again if the phase sequence or encoder of the synchronous motor is changed.
• For the synchronous motor, perform three or more times of auto-tuning, compare the obtained values of F1-06 (Encoder initial angle). The value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°, which indicates that the auto-tuning is successful.
• After the auto-tuning is completed, perform trial inspection running. Check whether the current is normal, whether the actual running direction is the same as the set direction. If the running direction is different from the set direction, change the value of F2-10.
• With-load auto-tuning is dangerous (inspection-speed running of many control cabinets is emergency electric running and the shaft safety circuit is shorted). Ensure that there is no person in the shaft in this auto-tuning mode.
The following figure shows the motor auto-tuning process.
- 81 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 5-2 Motor auto-tuning process
Set F1-25 correctly based on the actually used motor type
(Asynchronous motor)
Set encoder parameters F1-00 and F1-12 and motor parameters
F1-01 to F1-05 correctly
F1-25 = 1
(Synchronous motor)
With-load auto-tuning
No-load auto-tuning
Set F0-01 to 0
(Operation panel control)
With-load auto-tuning
No-load auto-tuning
F0-01 = 1
F1-11 = 1
F0-01 = 0
F1-11 = 2
For no-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to 2. The operation panel displays
"TUNE". Release the brake manually and press the RUN key.
Motor auto-tuning starts.
For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to 1. After the operation panel displays
"TUNE", press the RUN key.
Static motor auto-tuning starts.
After motor parameters F1-14 to F1-18 are obtained, restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance control). Motor auto-tuning is completed.
For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to
1. After the operation panel displays
"TUNE", press the UP/DOWN button for inspection to start auto-tuning. The motor starts to run.
Check the initial angle and wiring mode of the encoder (F1-06 and F1-08) after motor auto-tuning. Perform motor autotuning multiple times and ensure that the difference between values of F1-06 is within 5° and values of F1-08 are the same.
After motor parameter values
(F1-06 to F1-08, F1-14, F1-19 to
F1-20) and current loop parameters are obtained, restore
F0-01 to 1 (Distance control).
Motor auto-tuning is completed.
More descriptions of motor auto-tuning are as follows: a. When the NICE3000 motor auto-tuning.
new
drives the synchronous motor, an encoder is required to provide feedback signals. You must set the encoder parameters correctly before performing b. During synchronous motor auto-tuning, the motor needs to rotate. The best auto-tuning mode is no-load auto-tuning; if this mode is impossible, then try with-load auto-tuning.
c. For synchronous motor, with-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, shaft-D and shaft-Q inductance, current loop (including zero servo) PI parameters, and encoder initial angle; no-load auto-tuning additionally learns the encoder wiring mode.
d. For the asynchronous motor, static auto-tuning learns stator resistance, rotor resistance, and leakage inductance, and automatically calculates the mutual inductance and motor magnetizing current. Complete auto-tuning learns the mutual inductance, motor magnetizing current, and current loop parameters are learned.
■
Output State of RUN and Brake Contactors
For the sake of safety in different control modes, the system handles the output commands to the RUN contactor or brake contactor differently. In some situations, it is necessary to release the RUN contactor or the brake contactor manually
The following table lists the output state of the running and brake contactors.
- 82 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
Table 5-2 Output state of the RUN and brake contactors
Control mode
Output State
No-load Autotuning
(F1-11 = 2)
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Output
Not output
With-load Auto-tuning
(F1-11 = 1)
Synchronous motor
Asynchronous
Motor
Output
Output
Output
Not output
Operation
Panel
Control
(F0-01 = 0)
Not output
Not output
Distance
Control
(F0-01 = 1)
Output
Output
5.1.3 Trial Running at Normal Speed
After ensuring that running at inspection speed is normal, perform shaft auto-tuning, and then you can perform trial running at normal speed (the elevator satisfies the safety running requirements).
To perform shaft auto-tuning, the following conditions must be satisfied:
1. The signals of the encoder and leveling sensors (NC, NO) are correct and the slowdown switches are installed properly and act correctly.
2. When the elevator is at the bottom floor, the down slow-down 1 switch acts.
3. The elevator is in the inspection state. The control mode is distance control and CLVC
(F0-00 = 1, F0-01 = 1).
4. The top floor number (F6-00) and bottom floor number (F6-01) are set correctly.
5. The system is not in the fault alarm state. If there is a fault at the moment, press
STOP
RES
to reset the fault.
Then set F1-11 to 3 on the operation panel or set F7 to 1 on the keypad of the MCB, and start shaft auto-tuning.
Note
For shaft auto-tuning when there are only two floors, the elevator needs to run to below the bottom leveling position, that is, the leveling sensor is disconnected from the leveling plate. There is no such requirement when there are multiple floors.
5.1.4 Door Machine Controller Commissioning
Correlation of the door machine controller and the elevator controller is that the CTB outputs door open/close command and the door machine controller feeds back the door open/close limit signal.
After commissioning and installation of the door machine controller are complete, check whether the wiring is correct and whether the door open/close limit signals are consistent with the default setting. To perform the door machine controller commissioning, do as follows:
1. In the terminal control mode of the door machine controller, manually short the door open relay output terminal BM/B1 and the door close relay output terminal BM/B2 on
- 83 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
the CTB, and observe whether the door machine can open and close correspondingly.
If the door machine cannot act properly, check whether BM/B1 and BM/B2 are wrongly connected to the input terminals of the door machine controller and whether commissioning of the door machine controller is complete.
2. After ensuring that control of door open/close is normal, check whether the door open/ close signal feedback from the door machine controller is normal.
a. Check the NO/NC states of the door input signals by observing the input indicators on the CTB, as listed in the following table.
Table 5-3 NO/NC state of the door input signals
Door
State
Door open limit
Door close limit
Signal Input Point
X3 (door open limit 1) When the signal
X4 (door open limit 2)
X5 (door close limit 1)
X6 (door close limit 2) is active, the corresponding input indicator is ON.
NO Input Signal
Indicator State
F5-25
Setting
NC Input Signal
Indicator State
F5-25
Setting
Bit2 = 0 Bit2 = 1 When the
Bit4 = 1 signal is
Bit3 = 1
Bit5 = 1 active, the corresponding input indicator is OFF.
Bit4 = 0
Bit3 = 0
Bit5 = 0
For details on the setting of F5-25, see the description of F5-25 in Chapter 7.
b. Check whether the door open/close limit signal received by the system is correct.
As shown in the following figure which is part of display of parameter F5-35 on the operation panel, segments E and C of the upmost right 7-segment LED are the monitoring points of door open limit and door close limit.
־Segment C ON, segment E OFF: The system receives the door open limit signal and the door is in the open state.
־Segment E ON, segment C OFF: The system receives the door close limit signal and the door is in the close state.
The two segments should be OFF in the door open/close process.
Control the door to the open or close state manually and view the value of F5-35. If the following screen is displayed, it indicates that the door machine controller feeds back the correct door open and close signals.
Figure 5-3 Door open and close limit monitoring signals
5 4 3 2 1
A
F B
G
E
D
C
DP
Door 1 open limit
F
E
A
G
B
D
C
DP
Door 1 close limit
- 84 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
5.1.5 Riding Comfort
The riding comfort is an important factor of the elevator's overall performance. Improper installation of mechanical parts and improper parameter settings will cause discomfort.
Enhancing the riding comfort mainly involves adjustment of the controller output and the elevator's mechanical construction.
■
Controller Output
The parameters that may influence the riding comfort are described in this part.
Function
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
F1-09
Current filter time
(synchronous motor)
F1-18 Magnetizing current
0–3
0.01–300.00
0
0.00 A
F2-00
F2-01
Speed loop proportional gain KP1
Speed loop integral time TI1
0–100
0.01–10.00s
40
0.60s
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz
F2-03
F2-04
Speed loop proportional gain KP2
Speed loop integral time TI2
0–100
0.01–10.00s
35
0.80s
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz
Description
It can reduce the lowerfrequency vertical jitter during running.
Increasing the value can improve the loading capacity of the asynchronous motor.
F2-00 and F2-01 are the PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is lower than F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1). F2-03 and
F2-04 are the PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is higher than F2-
02 (Switchover frequency 2).
The regulation parameters between F2-02 and F2-04 are the weighted average value of F2-00 & F2-01 and F2-03 &
F2-04.
For a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time.
Be aware that a fast system response causes system oscillation.
The recommended regulating method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot satisfy the requirements, make slight regulation. Increase the proportional gain first to the largest value under which the system does not oscillate. Then decrease the integral time to ensure fast responsiveness and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are set to 0, only F2-03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function
Code
Parameter Name
F2-06 Current loop proportional gain
F2-07 Current loop integral gain
Setting
Range
10–500
10–500
Default
60
30
Description
F2-06 and F2-07 are the current loop adjustment parameters in the vector control algorithm.
- 85 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
The optimum values of these two parameters are obtained during motor auto-tuning, and you need not modify them. Appropriate setting of the parameters can restrain jitter during running and have obvious effect on the riding comfort.
Function
Code
Parameter Name
F2-18
Startup acceleration time
F3-00 Startup speed
F3-01
Startup holding time
Setting Range
0.000–1.500s
0.000–0.030 m/s 0.000 m/s
0.000–0.500s
Default
0.000s
0.000s
F3-18
F3-19
F3-20
F8-11
Zero-speed control time at startup
Brake release delay
Zero-speed control time at end
Brake apply delay
0.000–1.000s
0.000–2.000s
0.000–1.000s
0.200–1.500s
It can reduce the terrace feeling at startup caused by the breakout friction of the guide rail.
Description
0.200s
It specifies the zero speed holding time before brake output.
0.200s
0.600s
It specifies the brake release time.
0.300s
It specifies the zero speed holding time after the brake is applied.
0.200s
It specifies the brake apply time.
Figure 5-4 Running time sequence
V (speed)
F3-19
F3-18
F3-20
F8-11
F2-17
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Shorting door lock circuit contactor
Shorting motor
stator contactor
Internal
running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator contactor feedback t (time)
F3-18 (Zero-speed control time at startup) specifies the time from output of the RUN contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation on the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
F3-19 (Brake release delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
- 86 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
F3-20 (Zero-speed control time at end) specifies the zero-speed output time when the running curve ends.
F8-11 (Brake apply delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
The release time of the brakes varies according to the types and the response time of the brakes is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature. A high brake coil temperature slows the brake responsiveness. Thus, when the riding comfort at startup or stop cannot be improved by adjusting zero servo or load cell compensation parameters, appropriately increase the values of F3-19 and F8-11 to check whether the brake release time influences the riding comfort.
Default Remarks Function Code Parameter Name
F8-01
F2-11
F2-12
F2-13
Pre-torque selection
Setting Range
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
Zero servo current coefficient
Zero servo speed loop KP
Zero servo speed loop KI
0.20–50.0
0.00–2.00
0.00–2.00
0
15.0
0.50
0.60
Set this parameter based on actual requirement.
These are zeroservo regulating parameters when
F8-01 is set to
2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation).
When F8-01 is set to 2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation), the system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup.
a. Gradually increase F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) until that the rollback is cancelled at brake release and the motor does not vibrate.
b. Decrease the value of F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) if the motor jitters when
F2-13 (Zero servo speed loop TI) is less than 1.00.
c. Motor vibration and acoustic noise indicate excessive value of F2-12 (Zero servo speed loop KP). Decrease the default value of F2-12.
d. If the motor noise is large at no-load-cell startup, decrease the value of F2-12 or F2-13.
Function Code
F8-02
F8-03
F8-04
Parameter Name Setting Range
Pre-torque offset 0.0%–100.0%
Drive gain 0.00–2.00
Brake gain 0.00–2.00
Default
50.0%
0.60
0.60
Remarks
These are pre-torque regulating parameters.
When F8-01 is set to 1 (Load cell pre-torque compensation), the system with a load cell preoutputs the torque matched the load to ensure the riding comfort of the elevator.
- 87 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
• Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down
• Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up
F8-02 (Pre-torque offset) is actually the elevator balance coefficient, namely, the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the car and counterweight are balanced.
F8-03 (Drive gain) or F8-04 (Brake gain) scales the elevator’s present pre-torque coefficient when the motor runs at the drive or brake side. If the gain set is higher, then the calculated value of startup pro-torque compensation is higher. The controller identifies the braking or driving state according to the load cell signal and automatically calculates the required torque compensation value.
When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust the elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows:
• In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
• In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
■
Mechanical Construction
The mechanical construction affecting the riding comfort involves installation of the guide rail, guide shoe, steel rope, and brake, balance of the car, and the resonance caused by the car, guild rail and motor. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may arouse poor riding comfort.
1. Installation of the guide rail mainly involves the verticality and surface flatness of the guide rail, smoothness of the guide rail connection and parallelism between two guide rails (including guide rails on the counterweight side).
2. Tightness of the guide shoes (including the one on the counterweight side) also influences the riding comfort. The guide shoes must not be too loose or tight.
3. The drive from the motor to the car totally depends on the steel rope. Large flexibility of the steel rope with irregular resistance during the car running may cause curly oscillation of the car. In addition, unbalanced stress of multiple steel ropes may cause the car to jitter during running.
4. The riding comfort during running may be influenced if the brake arm is installed too tightly or released incompletely.
5. If the car weight is unbalanced, it will cause uneven stress of the guide shoes that connect the car and the guide rail. As a result, the guide shoes will rub with the guide rail during running, affecting the riding comfort.
6. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may also affect the riding comfort.
7. Resonance is an inherent character of a physical system, related to the material and quality of system components. If you are sure that the oscillation is caused by resonance, reduce the resonance by increasing or decreasing the car weight or counterweight and adding resonance absorbers at connections of the components (for example, place rubber blanket under the motor).
- 88 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
5.1.6 Password Setting
The NICE3000 new provides the parameter password protection function. Here gives an example of changing the password into 12345 ( indicates the blinking digit), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-5 Example of changing the password
Status parameter
(default display)
0.000
PRG F0 PRG FP
ENTER
PRG
PRG
FP-00
PRG
ENTER
00000
FP-01
If there is a blinking digit, press
/ / to modify the digit.
12345
ENTER
• After you set the user password (set FP-00 to a non-zero value), the system requires user password authentication (the system displays "------") when you press PRG. In this case, you can modify the function code parameters only after entering the password correctly.
• For factory parameters (group FF), you also need to enter the factory password.
• Do not try to modify the factory parameters. If these parameters are set improperly, the system may be unstable or abnormal.
• In the password protection unlocked state, you can change the password at any time. The last input number will be the user password.
• If you want to disable the password protection function, enter the correct password and then set FP-00 to 0. If FP-00 is a non-zero value at power-on, the parameters are protected by the password.
• Remember the password you set. Otherwise, the system cannot be unlocked.
5.2 System Application
5.2.1 Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure
Passengers may be trapped in the car if power failure suddenly happens during the use of the elevator. The emergency evacuation function at power failure is designed to solve the problem.
The emergency evacuation function is implemented in the following two modes:
• Uninterrupted power supply (UPS)
• Emergency automatic rescue device (ARD) power supply
• Shorting PMSM stator
- 89 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
The three modes are described in detailed in the following part.
■
Emergency 220 V UPS
In this scheme, the 220 V UPS provides power supply to the main unit and the drive control circuit. The following figure shows the emergency 220 V UPS circuit.
Figure 5-6 Emergency 220 V UPS circuit
R
N
21
UPC
62
61 22
UPS-220 V
1 2
(6 A)
Transformer
220 VAC
Y6
MCB
M6
R C
220 VAC
115 VAC
Safety contactor
21 22
UPC
UPS-0 V
3
UPC
4
(6 A)
115 VDC
5
13
6
14
R
S
T
NICE3000 new
Note
The UPS emergency evacuation signal can be output only by Y6.
The following figure shows various contacts of the contactors.
Figure 5-7 Various contacts of the contactors
Safety circuit
110 V
Phase sequence relay
11 14
53
UPC
54
71
UPC
72
Safety contactor
Emergency feedback
24 V
21
UPC
22
0V
X20
2 4
6
14
1 3 5 13
22
21
54
62 72 82
53 61 71 81
UPC
The UPS power is recommended in the following table.
Table 5-4 Recommended UPS power for each power class
UPS Power
1 kVA (700–800 W)
Controller Power
P ≤ 5.5 kW
2 kVA (1400–1600 W) 5.5 kW < P ≤ 11 kW
3 kVA (2100–2400 W) 15 kW ≤ P ≤ 22 kW
- 90 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
The following table lists the setting of the related parameters.
Table 5-5 Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme
Function Code
F6-48
F6-49
F8-09
Parameter Name
Emergency evacuation switching speed
Evacuation parking floor
Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure
Setting Range
0.010–0.630 m/s
0 to F6-01
0.05 m/s
F8-10
Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure
0: Invalid
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power supply
F5-20 (X20)
F5-31 (Y6)
X20 function selection
Y6 function selection
59 (UPS valid signal)
13 (Emergency evacuation automatic switchover)
■
Emergency ARD Power Supply
In this scheme, the ARD supplies power to the main circuit and control circuit. The following figure shows the schematic diagram.
Figure 5-8 Three-phase emergency ARD power supply
Power distribution box
L1
L2
L3
ARD for emergency leveling at power failure
L1
R
L2
S
L3
T
R
S
T
Elevator control cabinet
R
S
T
Emergency evacuation signal output
1
2
24V
X20
Phase shorting output
3
4
11
Phase relay
14
Safety circuit 110V
Emergency feedback 24V
3
ARD
4
1
11
Phase relay
14
ARD
2
X25 MCB
X20 MCB
- 91 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 5-9 Single-phase emergency ARD power supply
Power distribution box
L1
N1
ARD for emergency leveling at power failure
L1
L0
N1
N0
Emergency evacuation signal output
1
2
R
S
Elevator control cabinet
NICE 3000 new
R
controller
S
T
24V
X20
Emergency feedback 24V
1
ARD
2
The related configuration and description is as follows:
X20 MCB
Select the ARD with the nominal output power equal to or larger than the rated motor power.
Monarch 380V ARD outputs the single-phase emergency voltage between the R and T phases to the control cabinet. Note that for ARDs of other brands, the phases that output the emergency voltage may be different.
Table 5-6 Parameter setting under the ARD scheme
Function Code Parameter Name
F6-48
Setting Range
Emergency evacuation switching speed 0.010–0.630 m/s
F6-49
F8-09
Evacuation parking floor
Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure
0 to F6-01
0.05 m/s
F8-10
F5-20 (X20)
Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure
X20 function selection
0: Invalid
1: UPS
27 (UPS valid signal NO)
■
Shorting PMSM Stator
Shorting PMSM stator means shorting phases UVW of the PMSM, which produces resistance to restrict movement of the elevator car. In field application, an auxiliary NC contact is usually added to the NO contact of the output contactor to short PMSM UVW phases to achieve the effect. It is feasible in theory but may cause over-current actually.
Due to the poor quality of the contactor and the wiring of adding the auxiliary contact, the residual current of the controller is still high when the outputs UVW are shorted at abnormal stop. This results in an over-current fault and may damage the controller or motor.
Monarch's shorting PMSM stator scheme requires the installation of an independent contactor for shorting PMSM stator. The shorting PMSM stator function is implemented via the relay NC contact. On the coil circuit of the RUN contactor, an NO contact of the shorting
PMSM stator contactor is connected in serial, to ensure that output short-circuit does not occur when the parameter setting is incorrect.
- 92 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
The following figure shows wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor.
Figure 5-10 Wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor
FX
24V
Braking resistor
1
3
2
4
X18
Three-phase AC power supply
R
S
T
+ – PB
CN1
U
V
W
1
3
2
4
Motor
M
NICE3000 new
5
SW
6
Encoder
MCTC-PG
Shield
CN7
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
M3
Y4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6
Y1
M1
Y3
M3
C
C
R
SW
R
FX
5
FX
6
Safety circuit
FX: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
SW: RUN contactor
The parameter setting in such wiring mode is described in the following table.
110 VAC
Table 5-7 Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme
Function
Code
Parameter Name Value Description
F5-18
F5-28
FE-33
X18 function selection
Y3 function selection
Elevator function selection 2
30
12
-
Allocate X18 with "Input of shorting PMSM stator feedback signal".
Allocate Y3 with "Output of shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback signal".
Bit8 = 0: NC output contactor
Bit8 = 1: NO output contactor
More details on the emergency evacuation setting are provided in F6-45, as listed in the following table.
Table 5-8 Parameter description of F6-45
Bit
Function
Description
Bit0
Bit1
Direction determine mode
Bit2 Stop position
Binary Setting Remarks
0
0
Automatically calculating the direction
0
1
Load direction determining
(based on load cell data or halfload signal)
1 Stop at the base floor
0 Stop at nearest landing floor
1 Direction of
0 nearest landing floor
If the torque direction is automatically calculated, the noload-cell function must be enabled, that is, F8-01 is set to 2.
-
-
- 93 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit
Bit8
Function
Description
Emergency evacuation running time protection
Bit11 Reserved
Bit12
Shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive
0
Binary Setting
1
If the elevator does not arrive at the required floor after 50s emergency evacuation running time, Err31 is reported.
-
Remarks
When it is set that the torque direction is automatically calculated, enable automatic startup torque compensation.
This function is invalid when the function of switching over shorting stator braking mode to controller drive is used.
-
-
-
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Mode of shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive
Emergency evacuation exit mode
Function selection of shorting stator braking mode
1 Speed setting
0 Time setting
1 Exit at door close limit
0 Exit at door open limit
1 Enable this function.
If the speed is still lower than the value set in F6-48 after the elevator is in shorting stator braking mode for
10s, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds 50s, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
-
-
When this function is enabled, the setting of related function codes becomes effective.
- 94 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
5.2.2 Parallel Control of Two Elevators
The NICE3000 new supports parallel control of two elevators, which is implemented by using the CANbus communication port for information exchange and processing between the two elevators. The NICE3000 new
also supports group control of three to eight elevators if a group control board is used. This implements coordination between multiple elevators to respond to hall calls and improves the elevator use efficiency.
The NICE3000 new
is compatible with the NICE3000 and NICE5000. This section describes the use of two elevators in parallel control. For use of multiple elevators in group control, refer to the description of the group control board or contact Monarch.
■
Communication Ports for Parallel Control
The following table lists the parameter setting of parallel control.
Table 5-9 Parameter setting of parallel control by means of communication ports
Function
Code
F6-07
F6-08
F6-09
Parameter Name
Number of elevators in parallel/group mode
Elevator No.
Program control selection 2
Setting Range
1–8
1–8
Bit3: Parallel/Group control implemented at CAN2
Bit4: Group control in compatibility with
NICE3000
Setting in Parallel Control
2
Master elevator: 1
Slave elevator: 2
Bit3 = 1 when CN4 of the CAN2 communication port is used for parallel/group control
Bit4 = 1 when the NICE3000 is involved in group control
Note
By default, the CAN1 communication port is used for parallel control by default. Therefore, you need not select the parallel control port.
When the CAN2 communication port is used for parallel control, you need not set the CTB address switch.
■
Parallel Control by Using CAN1 (Terminal CN3)
When the CAN1 communication port (CN3 terminal) is used for parallel control, you need to set the CTB addresses, according to the following table.
Table 5-10 Address and jumper setting of the CTB for CAN1 is used for parallel control
CTB
CTB of elevator 1#
CTB of elevator 2#
Jumper Setting
ON OFF
ON OFF
J2
J2
Description
Short J2 at the OFF position or do not connect it. Set the CTB as the master when setting the address.
Short J2 at the ON position or do not connect it. Set the CTB as the slave when setting the address.
- 95 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 5-11 Wiring when CAN1 is used for parallel control
NICE3000 new
Elevator
1#
NICE3000 new
CN3 CN3 CN7
1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6
CN7
1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6
CAN+
COM
CN2
CTB
MCTC-CTB
Elevator
1#
CAN1 cables for parallel control
CAN+
COM
CN2
Elevator
2#
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
4
1
JP1
JP2
JP3
4
1
JP4
Up button
Up button indicator
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
JP3 JP1
JP4 JP2
Down button
Down button indicator
■
Parallel Control by Using CAN2 (Terminal CN4)
This mode can be implemented by directly connecting the CN4 terminals of two elevators and setting related parameters of group F6. You need not set the CTB addresses.
Figure 5-12 Wiring when CAN2 is used for parallel control
NICE3000
CN3 new
CN4
CAN2-
GND
CAN2 cables for parallel control
CN4
CAN2-
GND
CN3
NICE3000 new
Elevator
2#
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CN2
Elevator
1#
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
4
2
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
4
1
Up button indicator
Up button
Down button
Down button indicator
- 96 -
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CN2
Elevator
2#
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
JP3 JP1
JP4 JP2
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
■
Address Setting of Physical Floors
Physical floors, relative to the NICE control system, are defined by the installation position of the leveling plate. The floor (such as the ground floor) at which the lowest leveling plate is installed corresponds to physical floor 1. The top physical floor is the accumulative number of the leveling plates. In parallel mode, the physical floor numbers of the same floor for two elevators are consistent.
If the floor structures of two elevators are different, physical floors should start with the floor with the lowest position. The physical floors at the overlapped area of the two elevators are the same. Even if one elevator does not stop a floor in the overlapped area, a leveling plate should be installed there. You can make the elevator not stop at the floor by setting service floors.
When two elevators are in parallel mode, the addresses of the HCBs should be set according to physical floors. Parallel running can be implemented only when the HCB address set for one elevator is the same as that for the other elevator in terms of the same floor.
Note
In parallel mode, the top floor (F6-00) and bottom floor (F6-01) of the elevators should be set based on corresponding physical floors.
Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at floor B1, floor 1, floor 2, and floor 3, while elevator 2 stops at floor 1, floor 3, and floor 4. Now, you need to set related parameters and HCB addresses according to the following table.
Table 5-11 Parameter setting and HCB addresses of two elevators
Number of elevators in parallel/group mode (F6-07)
Elevator No. (F6-08)
Actual floor
B1
1
Physical floor
1
2
HCB address
1
2
Elevator 1
2
1
HCB display
FE-01 = 1101
FE-02 = 1901
Elevator 2
2
2
HCB address HCB display
2 3
3
4
Bottom floor
(F6-01)
Top floor (F6-00)
Service floor (F6-05)
4
5
3
4
FE-03 = 1902
FE-04 = 1903
1
4
65535
2
Non-stop floor but leveling plate required
4
5
FE-02 = 1901
FE-03 = 1902
FE-04 = 1903
FE-05 = 1904
2
5
65531 (not stop at physical floor
3)
- 97 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
5.2.3 Opposite Door Control
The NICE3000 new
supports four opposite door control modes: mode 1, mode 2, mode 3, and mode 4, which are implemented by using two methods set in Bit15 of FE-33.
Method A: Same as that of NICE3000
Method B: New method, completely different from that of NICE3000
1. Control modes and related parameter setting.
Table 5-12 Opposite door control modes and parameter setting
Opposite
Door Control
Mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Parameter Setting Function Description
FE-33
Bit15 = 1;
Fb-00 = 2
Method A (same as the NICE3000) FE-33 Bit15 = 1
FC-04 = 0
(Simultaneous control)
The front door and back door acts simultaneously upon arrival for hall calls and car calls.
FC-04 = 1
(Hall call independent, car call simultaneous)
FC-04 = 2
(Hall call independent, car call manual control)
The corresponding door opens upon arrival for hall calls from this door. The front door and back door act simultaneously upon arrival for car calls.
The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call from this door. Upon arrival for car calls, the door to open is selected between the front door and back door by using the door switchover switch.
FC-04 = 3
(Hall call independent, car call independent)
The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call and car calls from this door.
Use Method
The hall call addresses of the front door are set based on floor
(1–15). The hall call addresses of the back door are set based on floor +16
(17–31).
A maximum of
15 floors are supported.
- 98 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
Opposite
Door Control
Mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Parameter Setting Function Description Use Method
Fb-00 = 2
F8-16 =
N (N > current top floor
Method B FE-33 Bit15 = 0 (default)
FC-04 = 0
(Simultaneous control)
The front door and back door act simultaneously upon arrival for hall calls and car calls.
FC-04 = 1
(Hall call independent, car call simultaneous)
FC-04 = 2
(Hall call independent, car call manual control)
The corresponding door opens upon arrival for hall calls from this door. The front door and back door act simultaneously upon arrival for car calls.
The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call from this door. Upon arrival for car calls, the door to open is selected between the front door and back door by using the door switchover switch.
The door switchover signal is input from JP16 or JP20 of the
CCB.
FC-04 = 3
(Hall call independent, car call independent)
The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call and car calls from this door.
The hall call addresses of the front door are set based on floor
(1-N). The hall call addresses of the back door are set based on floor (N+1 to
N+20).
A maximum of
20 floors are supported.
Note
In the fire emergency and elevator lock state, the opposite door is under simultaneous control rather than independent control.
2. CCB wiring for opposite door control
The CCB wiring for modes 1, 2, and 3 either implemented in method A or B is the same, as shown in the following figures.
Figure 5-13 CCB wiring for modes 1, 2, and 3 (single operation box)
CN7
MCTC-CTB-A
CN8
Front door
Control
CN2
CCB
CN1
Front/Back door operation box
Control
Back door
- 99 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 5-14 CCB wiring for modes 1, 2, and 3 (dual operation boxes)
CN7
MCTC-CTB-A
CN8
Control
CCB
CN2
Back door control
Front door
CCB
CN2
CN1
Front door operation box
Front door control
CN1
Back door operation box
Control
Back door
For mode 4, The CCB wiring is different for method A and method B, as shown in the following figures.
Figure 5-15 CCB wiring for mode 4 (implemented in method A)
CN7
MCTC-CTB-A
CN8
Front door
Control
CN2
CCB
CN1
CN2
CCB
Control
Back door
CN1
Front door operation box
Back door operation box
Figure 5-16 CCB wiring for mode 4 (implemented in method B)
CN7
MCTC-CTB-A
CN8
CN2
CCB
CN2
CCB
Front door
Control
CN1
CN1
Front door operation box
Back door operation box
Control
Back door
- 100 -
NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
3. HCB wiring and address setting
Figure 5-17 HCB wiring and address setting of method A
NICE3000 new controller
24V COM MOD+ MOD-
CN3
HCB of front door
Address: 15
HCB of back door
Address: 31 Floor 15
Address: X
Address:
16+X
Floor X
Address: 1 Address: 17
Address setting of front door HCB (1 to 15)
Address setting of back door HCB+16 (17 to 31)
Floor 1
Figure 5-18 HCB wiring and address setting of method B
NICE3000 new controller
24V COM MOD+ MOD-
CN3
HCB of front door
Address: 20
HCB of back door
Address:
N+20
Floor 20
Address: X
Address:
N+X
Floor X
Address: 1
Address:
N+1
Address setting of front door HCB (1 to 20)
Address setting of back door HCB (N+1) to (N+20)
Set F8-16 = N, N > Number of floors
Floor 1
5.2.4 VIP Function Description
The NICE3000 new provides the VIP function that the elevator first directly runs to the VIP floor and provides services for special persons. After the system enters the VIP state, current car calls and halls are cleared; door open or close needs to be controlled manually; the elevator does not respond to hall calls.
- 101 -
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual
Here gives an example to explain how to use the VIP function and set the VIP floor.
Assume that there are floors 1 to 20 for the elevator, and floor 8 is set as the VIP floor.
Table 5-13 Parameter setting of the VIP function
Function
Code
F6-00
F6-01
Bottom floor of the elevator
F6-12 VIP floor
FE-32
Parameter
Name
Setting Range
Top floor of the elevator F6-01 to 40
Elevator function selection 1
1 to F6-00
0 to F6-00
Bit9: VIP function
Fd-07
Fd-08
HCB:JP1 input
HCB:JP2 input
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Elevator lock signal
2/34: Fire emergency signal
3/35: Current floor forbidden
4/36: VIP floor signal
5/37: Security floor signal
6/38: Door close button input
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall call (at VIP floor)
F6-46
Bit1: VIP enabled by terminal
VIP function selection
Bit2 to Bit7: Reserved
Value
20
1
8
Remarks
They are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator, determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates.
Set floor 8 as the VIP floor.
Bit9 = 1 The VIP service is enabled.
4
4
Bit1 = 1
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the
HCB. The setting is effective to the HCBs for all floors.
After the hall call input for the VIP function is active, the system enters the VIP state.
-
Bit8: Number of VIP car calls limited
Bit8 = 1
If this function is enabled, only one car call is supported in the VIP state.
When there is a hall call at the VIP floor, the system automatically enters the VIP state. After the VIP input terminal is ON, the elevator returns to the VIP floor to provide the VIP service.
The VIP running times is limited by Bit8 of F6-46. If Bit8 is set to 1, the elevator responds to only one car call (the last one); after arriving at the floor required by the car call, the elevator automatically exits the VIP state. If Bit8 is set to 0, the number of car calls is not limited.
The elevator automatically exits the VIP state if it does not enter the car call running within
30s after each time stop or after it executes all car calls. If there is no car call 30s after the elevator enters the VIP state, the elevator automatically exits the VIP state.
- 102 -
6
Function Code Table
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
6.1 Function Code Description
1. There are a total of 18 function code groups, each of which includes several function codes. The function codes adopt the three-level menu. The function code group number is Level-I menu; the function code number is Level-II menu; the function code setting is
Level-III menu.
2. The meaning of each column in the function code table is as follows:
Function Code
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default
Unit
Property
Indicates the function code number.
Indicates the parameter name of the function code.
Indicates the setting range of the parameter.
Indicates the default setting of the parameter at factory.
Indicates the measurement unit of the parameter.
Indicates whether the parameter can be modified
(including the modification conditions)
The modification property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows:
"
☆
": The parameter can be modified when the controller is in either stop or running state.
"
★
": The parameter cannot be modified when the controller is in the running state.
" ● ": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent mal-function.
6.2 Function Code Groups
On the operation panel, press
PRG
and then or , and you can view the function code groups. The function code groups are classified as follows:
- 104 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
F6
F7
F8
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Basic parameters
Motor parameters
Vector control parameters
Running control parameters
Floor parameters
Terminal function parameters
Basic elevator parameters
Test function parameters
Enhanced function parameters
F9 Time parameters
FA Keypad setting parameters
Fb Door function parameters
FC Protection function parameters
Fd
FE
Communication parameters
Elevator function parameters
FF Factory parameters
FP User parameters
Fr Leveling adjustment parameters
6.3 Function Code Table
Function
Code
F0-00
F0-01
F0-02
F0-03
F0-04
F0-05
F0-06
F0-07
F1-00
Parameter Name Setting Range
Control mode
Command source selection
Group F0: Basic parameters
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency
(V/F) control
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control
Running speed under operation panel control 0.050 to F0-04
Maximum running speed
0.100 to F0-04
Rated elevator speed 0.250–4.000
Rated elevator load 300–9999
Maximum frequency
Carrier frequency
20.00–99.00
0.5–16.0
Encoder type
Group F1: Motor parameters
0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental encoder
Default
1
1
0.050
1.600
1.600
1000
50.00
6.0
0
Unit
-
m/s m/s m/s kg
Hz kHz
-
Property
★
★
☆
★
★
★
★
★
★
F1-01
F1-02
Rated motor power
Rated motor voltage
0.7–75.0
0–600
Model dependent
Model dependent kW
V
★
★
- 105 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F1-03
Parameter Name
Rated motor current
Setting Range
0.00–655.00
F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00
F1-05
F1-06
F1-07
Rated motor rotational speed
Encoder initial angle
(synchronous motor)
Encoder angle at power-off
(synchronous motor)
0–3000
0.0–359.9
0.0–359.9
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
Synchronous motor wiring mode
Current filter time
(synchronous motor)
Encoder verification selection
0–15
0–3
0–65535
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
F1-15
F1-16
Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
Encoder pulses per revolution
Encoder wire-breaking detection time
0–10000
0–10.0
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000
Leakage inductance
(asynchronous motor) 0.00–300.00
F1-17
F1-18
F1-19
F1-20
F1-21
F1-25
Mutual inductance
(asynchronous motor) 0.1–3000.0
Magnetizing current
(asynchronous motor) 0.01–300.00
Shaft Q inductance
(torque)
0.00–650.00
Shaft D inductance
(excitation)
Back EMF
0.00–650.00
Motor type
0–65535
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
0
0
Unit
A
Hz
RPM
Degree
(°)
Degree
(°)
Property
★
★
★
★
★
0
0
0
0
2048
1.0
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
3.00
3.00
0
1
-
-
-
-
PPR s
Ω
Ω mH mH
A mH mH
-
-
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 106 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F2-00
F2-01
F2-02
F2-03
F2-04
F2-05
F2-06
F2-07
F2-08
F2-10
F2-11
F2-12
F2-13
F2-16
F2-17
F2-18
F3-00
F3-01
F3-02
F3-03
F3-04
F3-05
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Group F2: Vector control parameters
Speed loop proportional gain KP1
0–100
Speed loop integral time TI1
Switchover frequency
1
Speed loop proportional gain KP2
Speed loop integral time TI2
Switchover frequency
2
0.01–10.00
0.00 to F2-05
0–100
0.01–10.00
F2-02 to F0-06
Current loop KP1
(torque)
Current loop KI1
(torque)
Torque upper limit
10–500
10–500
40
0.60
2.00
35
0.80
5.00
60
30
150.0
Elevator running direction
0.0–200.0
0: Direction unchanged
1: Direction reversed
0
Zero servo current coefficient
Zero servo speed loop
KP
Zero servo speed loop
KI
Torque acceleration time
Torque deceleration time
0.20–50.0
0.00–2.00
0.00–2.00
1–500
1–500
15
0.5
0.6
1
350
Startup acceleration time
0.000–1.500
Group F3: Running control parameters
0.000
Startup speed
Startup holding time
Acceleration rate
Acceleration start jerk time
0.000–0.030
0.000–0.500
0.200–1.500
0.300–4.000
0.000
0.000
0.600
2.500
Acceleration end jerk time
Deceleration rate
0.300–4.000
0.200–1.500
2.500
0.600
Unit m/s s m/s
2 s s m/s
2
Property
-
s s
Hz
Hz
-
-
%
-
ms
-
ms s
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 107 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F3-13
F3-14
F3-15
F3-16
Parameter Name
F3-06
F3-07
F3-08
Deceleration end jerk time
Deceleration start jerk time
Special deceleration rate
F3-09
F3-10
Pre-deceleration distance
Re-leveling speed
F3-11 Inspection speed
F3-12
Position of up slowdown 1
Position of down slowdown 1
Position of up slowdown 2
Position of down slowdown 2
Position of up slowdown 3
F3-17
F3-18
F3-19
F3-20
F3-21
F3-22
F3-24
F4-00
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
Setting Range
0.300–4.000
0.300–4.000
0.200–1.500
0–90.0
0.000–0.080
0.100–0.630
0.000–300.00
0.000–300.00
0.000–300.00
0.000–300.00
0.000–300.00
Position of down slowdown 3
Zero-speed control time at startup
Brake release delay
0.000–300.00
0.000–1.000
0.000–2.000
Zero-speed control time at end
0.000–1.000
Low-speed re-leveling speed
0.080 to F3-11
Acceleration rate at emergency evacuation 0.100–1.300
Program function selection
Leveling adjustment
Current floor
High byte of current floor position
Low byte of current floor position
0: Reserved
1: Slip experiment enabled
Group F4: Floor parameters
0–60
F6-01 to F6-00
0–65535
0–65535
Default
2.500
2.500
0.900
0.0
0.040
0.250
0.00
0.00
0.200
0.600
0.300
0.100
0.100
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
30
1
1
34464
mm
-
Pulses
Pulses
Unit s s m/s
2 mm m/s m/s m m m m m m m/s m/s
2 s s s
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
●
●
- 108 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
F4-09
F4-10
F4-11
F4-12
F4-13
F4-14
F4-15
F4-16
F4-17
F4-18
F4-19
F4-20
F4-21
F4-22
F4-23
F4-24
Parameter Name Setting Range
Length 1 of leveling plate
Length 2 of leveling plate
High byte of floor height 1
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Low byte of floor height
1
0–65535
High byte of floor height 2
Low byte of floor height
2
High byte of floor height 3
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Low byte of floor height
3
0–65535
High byte of floor height 4
Low byte of floor height
4
High byte of floor height 5
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Low byte of floor height
5
0–65535
High byte of floor height 6
Low byte of floor height
6
High byte of floor height 7
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Low byte of floor height
7
0–65535
High byte of floor height 8
Low byte of floor height
8
High byte of floor height 9
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Low byte of floor height
9
0–65535
High byte of floor height 10
0–65535
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Unit
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
- 109 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F4-25
F4-80
F4-81
F4-82
F4-83
F5-00
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Low byte of floor height
10
0–65535
Floor height 11 to floor height 37
High byte of floor height 38
Low byte of floor height
38
High byte of floor height 39
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0
0
0
0
Low byte of floor height
39
0–65535
Group F5: Terminal function parameters
0
Attendant/Automatic switchover time
3–200 3
X1 function selection
X2 function selection
X3 function selection
X4 function selection
X5 function selection
X6 function selection
X7 function selection
08/40: Inspection signal
09/41: Inspection up signal
10/42: Inspection down signal
11/43: Fire emergency signal
12/44: Up limit signal
13/45: Down limit signal
14/46: Overload signal
15/47: Full-load signal
16/48: Up slow-down 1 signal
17/49: Down slow-down
1 signal
18/50: Up slow-down 2 signal
19/51: Down slow-down
2 signal
20/52: Up slow-down 3 signal
21/53: Down slow-down
3 signal
33
35
34
4
5
38
39
X8 function selection 22
(To be continued)
Unit
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses s
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 110 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F5-09
F5-10
F5-11
F5-12
F5-13
F5-14
F5-15
F5-16
F5-17
F5-18
F5-19
F5-20
F5-21
F5-22
F5-23
F5-24
F5-25
Parameter Name Setting Range
X9 function selection
X10 function selection
X11 function selection
X12 function selection
X13 function selection
X14 function selection
X15 function selection
X16 function selection
X17 function selection
X18 function selection
X19 function selection
X20 function selection
X21 function selection
X22 function selection
X23 function selection
22/54: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
23/55: Firefighter switch signal
24/56: Door machine 1 light curtain signal
25/57: Door machine 2 light curtain signal
26/58: Brake travel switch 1
27/59: UPS valid signal
28/60: Elevator lock signal
29/61: Safety circuit 2
30/62: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal
31/63: Door lock circuit 2 feedback signal
32/64: Reserved
65/97: Door machine 1 safety edge signal
66/98: Door machine 2 safety edge signal
67/99: Motor overheat signal
68/100: Earthquake signal
69/101: Back door forbidden signal
70/102: Light-load signal
71/103: Half-load signal
72/104: Fire emergency floor switchover signal
76/108: Door 1 open input
77/109: Door 2 open input
78/110: Brake travel switch 2 input
X24 function selection
CTB input type
(End)
0–511
Default
40
09
10
44
45
48
49
50
51
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
320
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Unit Property
-
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 111 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F5-26
F5-27
F5-28
F5-29
F5-30
F5-31
F5-32
Parameter Name
Y1 function selection
Y2 function selection
Y3 function selection
Y4 function selection
Y5 function selection
Y6 function selection
Communication state display
Setting Range
0: Invalid
1: RUN contactor control
2: Brake contactor control
3: Shorting door lock circuit contactor control
4: Fire emergency floor arrival signal feedback
5: Door machine 1 open
6: Door machine 1 close
7: Door machine 2 open
8: Door machine 2 close
9: Brake and RUN contactors healthy
10: Fault state
11: Running monitor
12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover
14: System healthy
15: Emergency buzzer control
16: Higher-voltage startup of brake
17: Elevator running in up direction
18: Lamp/Fan running
19: Medical sterilization
20: Non-door zone stop
21: Electric lock
22: Non-service state
Monitoring of
CANbus and Modbus communication states
Default
1
2
3
4
0
0
-
Unit Property
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
★
★
★
★
★
★
●
- 112 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-04
F6-05
F6-06
Function
Code
F5-33
F5-34
F5-35
F5-36
F5-37
F5-38
F5-39
F6-00
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Terminal program control
Terminal state display
Terminal state display
Load cell input selection
Bit3: Elevator fire emergency requirement for Hong Kong
Bit4: Arrival gong disabled at night
Bit6: Door lock disconnected at inspection switched over to normal running
Bit7: Fault code not displayed on the keypad
Bit8: Door open command cancelled immediately at door open limit
Bit9: Car stop and zerospeed torque holding at abnormal brake feedback
Monitoring of I/O terminals on MCB
Monitoring of I/O terminals on CTB, CCB and HOP
0: Invalid
1: CTB digital input
2: CTB analog input
3: MCB analog input
0
1
-
-
X25 function selection 0: No function
X26 function selection
X27 function selection
4: Safety circuit signal
5: Door lock circuit signal
Group F6: Basic elevator parameters
Top floor of the elevator
F6-01 to 40
Bottom floor of the elevator
Parking floor
1 to F6-00
F6-01 to F6-00
Fire emergency floor F6-01 to F6-00
Elevator lock floor
Service floors 1
Service floors 2
F6-01 to F6-00
0–65535
0–65535
0
0
0
9
1
1
1
1
65535
65535
Unit Property
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
★
●
●
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 113 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F6-07
F6-08
F6-09
F6-10
Parameter Name Setting Range
Number of elevators in parallel/group mode
Elevator No.
Elevator program control
1–8
1–8
Bit0: Dispersed waiting
Bit3: Parallel/Group control implemented at
CAN2
Bit4: Group control in compatibility with
NICE3000
Bit6: Clear floor number and display direction in advance
Bit8: Unidirectional hall call (single hall call button)
Bit 9: Not detecting analog wire breaking
Bit10: Err30 judgment at re-leveling cancellation
Bit14: Time interval detection of safety circuit
2 and door lock circuit 2
Leveling sensor filter time
10–50
Default
1
1
0
14
Unit
-
-
Property
★
★
ms
★
★
- 114 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F6-11
F6-12
F6-13
F6-14
F6-15
F6-16
F6-17
F6-18
F6-19
Parameter Name Setting Range
Elevator function selection
VIP floor
Security floor
Start time of down collective selective 1
End time of down collective selective 1
Start time of down collective selective 2
End time of down collective selective 2
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
Start time of timebased floor service 1
End time of time-based floor service 1
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
Bit1: Disabling returning to base floor for verification
Bit2: Cancelling auto sequential arrange of hall call floor addresses to be displayed
Bit5: Current detection valid at startup for synchronous motor
Bit6: Reversing MCB lamp output
Bit7: Door open valid at non-door zone in the inspection state
Bit8: Door open and close once after inspection turned to normal
Bit10: Buzzer not tweet upon re-leveling
Bit11: Super short floor function
Bit13: Err53 fault auto reset
Bit14: Up slow-down not reset for super short floor
Bit15: Down slow-down not reset for super short floor
0 to F6-00
0 to F6-00
Default
8448
0
0
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
Unit
-
-
-
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
Property
★
★
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
- 115 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
F6-25
F6-26
F6-27
F6-28
F6-29
F6-30
F6-31
F6-35
F6-36
Function
Code
F6-20
F6-21
F6-22
F6-23
F6-24
F6-37
F6-38
F6-39
Parameter Name Setting Range
Service floor 1 of timebased floor service 1
Service floor 2 of timebased floor service 1
Start time of timebased floor service 2
0–65535
0–65535
00.00–23.59
End time of time-based floor service 2
00.00–23.59
Service floor 1 of timebased floor service 2
Service floor 2 of timebased floor service 2
Peak 1 start time
Peak 1 end time
Peak 1 floor
Peak 2 start time
Peak 2 end time
0–65535
0–65535
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
F6-01 to F6-00
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
Peak 2 floor
Service floor 3
Service floor 3 of timebased floor service 1
Service floor 3 of timebased floor service 2
F6-01 to F6-00
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59
Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59
Default
65535
65535
00.00
00.00
65535
65535
00.00
00.00
1
00.00
00.00
1
65535
65535
65535
00.00
00.00
-
-
HH.MM
HH.MM
-
HH.MM
HH.MM
-
-
-
-
HH.MM
HH.MM
Unit
-
-
HH.MM
HH.MM
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
☆
☆
☆
★
☆
- 116 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F6-40
Parameter Name
Program control selection 1
Setting Range
Bit0: Disability function
Bit1: Soft limit function
Bit2: JP16 input used as back door selection
Bit3: JP16 input used as the back door open signal
Bit4: Opening only one door of opposite doors under manual control
Bit5: Timed elevator lock
Bit6: Manual door
Bit7: Reserved
Bit9: Disabling reverse floor number clear
Bit10: Displaying next arriving floor number
Bit11: Responding to car calls first
Bit12: Car call assisted command in single door used as disability function
Bit13: Folding command used as disability function and back door function
Bit14: Car call command folding
Bit15: JP20 used for switchover to back door
Default
0
Unit Property
-
★
- 117 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F6-41
F6-42
Parameter Name
Program control selection 2
Program control selection 3
Setting Range
Bit2: Inspection to stop due to slow-down 1
Bit4: Buzzer tweet during door open delay
Bit6: Cancelling door open delay
Bit8: Elevator lock at door open
Bit9: Display available at elevator lock
Bit10: Elevator lock in the attendant state
Bit11: Blinking at arrival
(within the time set in
F6-47)
Bit12: Door re-open during door open delay
Bit13: Door re-open after car call of the present floor
Bit1: Cancelling door open/close command at delay after door open/ close limit
Bit2: Not judging door lock state at door close output
Bit3: Door close command output during running
Bit4: Returning to base floor for verification at first-time power-on
Bit5: Landing at nearest floor at elevator lock
Default
0
0
Unit Property
-
-
★
★
- 118 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F6-43
Parameter Name
Attendant function selection
Setting Range
Bit0: Calls cancelled after entering attendant state
Bit1: Not responding to hall calls
Bit2: Attendant/
Automatic state switchover
Bit3: Door close at jogging
Bit4: Automatic door close
Bit5: Buzzer tweeting at intervals in attendant state
Bit6: Buzzer tweeting at intervals in attendant state
Bit7: Car call button blinking to prompt
Default
0
Unit Property
-
★
- 119 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F6-44
Parameter Name
Fire emergency function selection
Setting Range
Bit3: Arrival gong output in inspection or fire emergency state
Bit4: Multiple car calls registered in fire emergency state
Bit5: Retentive at power failure in fire emergency state
Bit6: Closing door by holding down the door close button
Bit7: Reserved
Bit8: Door close at car call registering
Bit9: Displaying hall calls in fire emergency state
Bit10: Firefighter forced running
Bit11: Exiting fire emergency state for firefighter
Bit12: Not clearing car calls at reverse door open in firefighter running state
Bit14: Opening door by holding down the door open button
Bit15: Automatic door open in fire emergency floor
Default
16456
Unit Property
-
★
- 120 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F6-45
F6-46
F6-47
F6-48
F6-49
F7-00
F7-01
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Emergency evacuation function selection
VIP function selection
Bit0-Bit1: Direction determine mode
(00: Automatically calculating direction;
01: Load direction determining; 10:
Direction of nearest landing floor)
Bit2: Stopping at evacuation parking floor
Bit3: Reserved
Bit4: Compensation at startup
Bit8: Emergency running time protection
Bit10: Emergency buzzer output
Bit12: Shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive
Bit13: Mode of shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive
Bit14: Emergency evacuation exit mode
Bit15: Function selection of shorting stator braking mode
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall call (at VIP floor)
Bit1: VIP enabled by terminal
Bit8: Number of VIP car calls limited
Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0
Emergency evacuation switching speed
0.010–0.630
Evacuation parking floor
0 to F6-01
Group F7: Test function parameters
Car call floor registered 0 to F6-00
Up call floor registered 0 to F6-00
0
0
0
0.010
0
0
0
Unit Property
s s m/s
-
-
-
★
★
☆
★
★
☆
☆
- 121 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
F7-02
F7-03
F7-04
F7-05
F7-06
F7-07
F7-08
F8-00
F8-01
F8-02
F8-03
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Down call floor registered
0 to F6-00
Random running times 0–60000
Hall call enabled
Door open enabled
Overload function
Limit switch
0: Yes
1: No
0: Yes
1: No
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0
0
0
0
0
0
Time interval of random running
0–1000
Group F8: Enhanced function parameters
0
Load for load cell autotuning
0–100 0
Pre-torque selection
Pre-torque offset
Drive gain
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
0.0–100.0
0.00–2.00
0
50.0
0.60
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00
0.60
F8-05
F8-06
F8-07
F8-08
F8-09
Current car load
Car no-load load
Car full-load load
Anti-nuisance function
0–1023
0–1023
0–1023
0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
1: Nuisance judged by load cell
2: Nuisance judged by light curtain
4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal
Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure
0.000 to F3-11
0
0
100
0
0.050
-
s
Unit
-
-
-
Property
☆
☆
☆
-
☆
☆
☆
☆
%
%
-
-
-
-
-
-
m/s
★
★
☆
★
★
★
★
●
★
★
- 122 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
F8-10
F8-11
F8-12
F8-14
F8-16
F8-17
F9-00
F9-01
F9-02
F9-03
Parameter Name Setting Range
Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure
0: Motor not running
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power supply
Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500
Fire emergency floor 2 0 to F6-00
HCB communication setting
Bit4: Energy saving of
HCB communication
Start address of hall call auxiliary command 0–40
Hall call address check 0–1
Group F9: Time parameters
Idle time before returning to base floor 0–240
Time for fan and lamp to be turned off
0–240
Motor running time limit
0–45
Clock: year 2000–2100
F9-04
F9-05
F9-06
Clock: month
Clock: day
Clock: hour
1–12
1–31
0–23
F9-07
F9-09
F9-11
F9-12
F9-13
Clock: minute
Accumulative running time
High byte of running times
Low byte or running times
Maintenance notification period
0–59
0–65535
0–9999
0–9999
0–99
Default
0
0.200
0
0
0
0
10
2
45
Current year
Current month
Current day
Current hour
Current minute
0
0
0
0
Unit
-
-
-
MM h day
YYYY
MM
DD
HH min min s s
-
-
-
-
Property
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
●
●
●
★
- 123 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
FA-00
Keypad display selection
Group FA: Keypad setting parameters
0: Reversed display of physical floor
1: Positive display of physical floor
2: Reversed display of hall call floor
3: Positive display of hall call floor
FA-01
Display in running state
FA-02 Display in stop state
1–65535
1–65535
3
65535
65535
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9
0.0
FA-05
Control board software
(ZK)
0–65535
FA-06
Drive board software
(DSP)
0–65535
FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100
FA-11 Pre-torque current
FA-12 Logic information
FA-13 Curve information
FA-14 Set speed
0.0–200.0
0–65535
0–65535
0.000–4.000
FA-15 Feedback speed
FA-16 Bus voltage
FA-17 Present position
FA-18 Output current
FA-19 Output frequency
FA-20 Torque current
FA-21 Output voltage
FA-22 Output torque
FA-23 Output power
FA-24
Communication interference
FA-26 Input state 1
0.000–4.000
0–999.9
0.00–300.0
0.0–999.9
0.00–99.99
0.0–999.9
0–999.9
0–100
0.00–99.99
0–65535
0–65535
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
-
-
°C
%
-
m/s m/s
V m
A
Hz
A
V
% kW
-
-
-
-
Degree
(°)
-
Property
☆
☆
☆
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
- 124 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
FA-27
FA-28
FA-30
FA-31
FA-32
FA-33
FA-34
FA-35
FA-36
FA-37
FA-46
FA-47
FA-48
Fb-00
Fb-01
Fb-02
Fb-03
Fb-04
Fb-05
Fb-06
Fb-07
Fb-08
Fb-09
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Input state 2
Input state 3
Input state 5
Output state 1
Output state 2
Car input state
Car output state
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Hall sate
System state 1
0–65535
0–65535
System state 2 0–65535
Hall call communication state 1 0–65535 (floors 1–16)
Hall call communication state 2 0–65535 (floors 17–32)
Hall call communication state 3 0–65535 (floors 33–40)
Group Fb: Door function parameters
Number of door machine(s)
CTB software
1–2
00–999
Service floors 1 of door machine 1
0–65535
Service floors 2 of door machine 1
Service floors 1 of door machine 2
0–65535
0–65535
Service floors 2 of door machine 2
0–65535
Door open protection time
Arrival gong output delay
Door close protection time
Door re-open times
5–99
0–1000
5–99
0–20
0
0
0
1
0
65535
65535
65535
65535
10
0
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● s ms s
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
●
☆
☆
☆
☆
- 125 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
Fb-10
Fb-11
Fb-12
Fb-13
Fb-14
Fb-15
Fb-16
Fb-17
Fb-18
Fb-19
FC-00
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Door state of standby elevator
0: Closing the door as normal at base floor
1: Waiting with door open at base floor
2: Waiting with door open at each floor
Door open holding time for hall call
Door open holding time for car call
Door open holding time at base floor
Door open delay
Special door open holding time
Manual door open holding time
1–1000
1–1000
1–1000
10–1000
10–1000
1–60
Holding time for forced door close
Service floors 3 of door machine 1
5–180
0–65535
0
5
3
10
30
30
5
120
65535
Service floors 3 of door machine 2
0–65535 65535
Group FC: Protection function parameters
Program control for protection function
Bit0: Short-circuit to ground detection at power-on
Bit2: Decelerating to stop at valid light curtain
Bit9: Mode without door open/close limit
0
Unit Property
-
-
☆
★ s s s s s s s
-
-
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
- 126 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Unit Property
-
★
0
0
0
0
0
0
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
★
☆
●
●
●
★
★ v m m/s m/s
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 127 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range
FC-18
Output frequency upon designated fault
0.00–99.99
FC-19
Torque current upon designated fault
FC-20 1st fault code
FC-21
FC-22
1st fault subcode
1st fault month and day
0.0–999.9
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
FC-23
1st fault hour and minute
FC-24 2nd fault code
FC-25 2nd fault subcode
FC-26
2nd fault month and day
FC-27
2nd fault hour and minute
FC-28 3rd fault code
FC-29 3rd fault subcode
FC-30
3rd fault month and day
FC-31
3rd fault hour and minute
FC-32 4th fault code
FC-33 4th fault subcode
FC-34
4th fault month and day
FC-35
4th fault hour and minute
0–23.59
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
···
FC-56 10th fault code
FC-57 10th fault subcode
FC-58
FC-59
10th fault month and day
10th fault hour and minute
FC-60 Latest fault code
FC-61 Latest fault subcode
FC-62
Latest fault month and day
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
Hz
A
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
MM.DD
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
- 128 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
FC-63
FC-64
FC-65
FC-66
FC-67
FC-68
FC-69
FC-70
FC-71
FC-72
Fd-00
Fd-02
Fd-03
Fd-04
Fd-05
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Latest fault hour and minute
Logic information of latest fault
Curve information of latest fault
Set speed upon latest fault
Feedback speed upon latest fault
Bus voltage upon latest fault
Current position upon latest fault
0–23.59
0–65535
0–65535
0.000–4.000
0.000–4.000
0.0–999.9
0.0–300.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Output current upon latest fault
Output frequency upon latest fault
0–999.9
0.00–99.99
Torque current upon latest fault
0.0–999.9
Group Fd: Communication parameters
Baud rate
Local address
0: 9600
1: 38400
0–127
0: Broadcast address
Communication response delay
Communication timeout
0–20
0.0–60.0
Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00
0
0
0
0
1
10
0.0
0.00
m
A m/s v
Hz
A
Unit
HH.MM
-
m/s
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● bit/s
ms s s
★
★
★
★
★
- 129 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
Fd-07
Fd-08
Fd-09
Fd-10
Parameter Name
HCB:JP1 input
HCB:JP2 input
HCB:JP1 output
HCB:JP2 output
Fd-11 HCB-B:JP1 input
Fd-12 HCB-B:JP2 input
Fd-13
Fd-14
Fd-15
Fd-16
HCB-B:JP3 input
HCB-B:JP4 input
HCB-B:JP5 input
HCB-B:JP6 input
Setting Range
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Elevator lock signal
2/34: Fire emergency signal
3/35: Current floor forbidden
4/36: VIP floor signal
5/37: Security floor signal
6/38: Door close button input signal
7/39: Second fire emergency floor signal
0: Invalid
1: Up arrival indicator
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop output
5: Non-service state output
6: Door close button indicator output
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Light-load signal
2/34: Half-load signal
3/35: Door 2 selection
4/36: Door 2 restricted
(back door forbidden)
5/37: Door 1 safety edge
6/38: Door 2 safety edge
7/39: Single/Double door selection
Default
1
2
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit Property
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 130 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
Fd-17
Fd-18
Fd-19
Fd-20
Fd-21
Fd-22
Fd-23
Fd-24
Fd-25
Fd-26
FE-00
FE-01
FE-02
FE-03
FE-04
FE-05
FE-06
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
HCB-B:A1 output
HCB-B:A2 output
HCB-B:B1 output
HCB-B:B2 output
HCB-B:C1 output
HCB-B:C2 output
HCB-B:C3 output
HCB-B:C4 output
HCB-B:C5 output
0: Reserved
1: Fault output
2: Non-door zone stop output
3: Non-service state output
4: Fire emergency output
5: Power failure emergency output
6: Door lock valid
7: Night output signal
HCB-B:C6 output
Group FE: Elevator function parameters
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Collective selective mode
Floor 1 display
Floor 2 display
Floor 3 display
Floor 4 display
Floor 5 display
Floor 6 display
0: Full collective selective
1: Down collective selective
2: Up collective selective
The two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits indicate the display code of the unit's digit.
00: Display "0"
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
11: Display "B"
12: Display "G"
13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
16: Display "P"
(To be continued)
0
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
- 131 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
FE-07
FE-08
FE-09
FE-10
FE-11
FE-12
FE-13
FE-14
FE-15
Floor 9 display
Floor 10 display
Floor 11 display
Floor 12 display
Floor 16 to floor 30 display
FE-31
FE-35
FE-36
FE-37
FE-38
FE-39
FE-40
FE-41
FE-42
FE-43 Floor 40 display
FE-52 Highest digit selection 1
FE-53
FE-54
FE-55
Parameter Name
Floor 7 display
Floor 8 display
Floor 13 display
Floor 14 display
Floor 15 display
Floor 31 display
Floor 32 display
Floor 33 display
Floor 34 display
Floor 35 display
Floor 36 display
Floor 37 display
Floor 38 display
Floor 39 display
Highest digit selection 2
Highest digit selection 3
Highest digit selection 4
Setting Range
17: Display "R"
18: Display "-"
19: No display
20: Display "12"
21: Display "13"
22: Display "23"
23: Display "C"
24: Display "D"
25: Display "E"
26: Display "F"
27: Display "I"
28: Display "J"
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
31: Display "O"
32: Display "Q"
33: Display "S"
34: Display "T"
35: Display "U"
36: Display "V"
37: Display "W"
38: Display "X"
39: Display "Y"
40: Display "Z"
41: Display "15"
42: Display "17"
43: Display "19"
FE-56 Highest digit selection 5
(End)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
Default
1907
1908
1909
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0307
0308
0309
0400
0
0
0
0
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0
- 132 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table
Function
Code
FE-32
FE-33
Parameter Name
Elevator function selection 1
Elevator function selection 2
Setting Range
Bit2: Re-leveling function
Bit3: Door pre-open function
Bit4: Stuck hall call cancellation
Bit5: Night security floor function
Bit6: Down collective selective peak service
Bit7: Parallel/Group control peak service
Bit8: Time-based service floor function
Bit9: VIP function
Bit11: Car call deletion
Bit12: Hall call deletion
Bit15: Reserved
Bit1: Door open holding at open limit
Bit2: Door close command not output upon door close limit
Bit4: Auto reset for RUN and brake contactor stuck
Bit5: Slow-down switch stuck detection
Bit7: Forced door close
Bit8: NO/NC output selection of shorting motor stator contactor
Bit9: Immediate stop upon re-leveling
Bit13: High-speed elevator protection function
Bit15: Opposite door independent control
Default
34816
36
Unit Property
-
-
☆
☆
- 133 -
Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual
Function
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Fr-00
Fr-01
Leveling adjustment function
Group Fr: Leveling adjustment parameters
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
Leveling adjustment record 1
30030
Fr-02
Fr-20
FP-01
FP-02
Leveling adjustment record 2
Parameter update
User-defined parameter display
00000–60060
…
Leveling adjustment record 20
Group FF: Factory parameters
Group FP: User parameters
FP-00 User password 0–65535
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings
2: Clear fault records
0: Invalid
1: Valid
30030
30030
0
0
0
Unit
mm mm
… mm
-
-
-
Property
★
★
★
★
☆
★
★
- 134 -
7
Description of Function Codes
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes
Group F0: Basic Parameters
Function
Code
Parameter
Name
Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-00
Control mode
• 0: Sensorless vector control
(SVC)
• 1: Closed-loop vector control
(CLVC)
• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
1 -
★
It is used to set the control mode of the system.
• 0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
It is applicable to low-speed running during no-load commissioning of the asynchronous motor, fault judgment at inspection, and synchronous motor running on special conditions.
• 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
It is applicable to normal running in distance control.
• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to equipment detection where the ratio between the voltage and the frequency is fixed, control is simple, and the low-frequency output torque feature is poor.
Function
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-01
Command source selection
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control
1 -
It is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references.
• 0: Operation panel control
★
The controller is operated by pressing
RUN
and
STOP
RES
on the operation panel, and the running speed is set by F0-02 (Running speed under operation panel control). This method is applicable only to the test or motor no-load auto-tuning.
• 1: Distance control
This method is used in the NICE series integrated elevator controller. During inspection, the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-11. During normal running, the controller automatically calculates the speed and running curve for the elevator based on the distance between the current floor and the target floor within the rated elevator speed, implementing direct travel ride.
- 136 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code Parameter Name
F0-02
Running speed under operation panel control
Setting Range
0.050 to F0-04
Default
0.050
Unit m/s
Property
☆
It is used to set the running speed in the operation panel control mode.
Note that this function is enabled only when F0-01 is set to 0 (Operation panel control). You can change the running speed of the elevator by modifying this parameter during running
Function Code Parameter Name
F0-03 Maximum running speed
Setting Range
0.250 to F0-04
Default
1.600
Unit m/s
Property
★
It is used to set the actual maximum running speed of the elevator. The value must be smaller than the rated elevator speed.
Function Code
F0-04
Parameter Name
Rated elevator speed
Setting Range
0.250–4.000
Default
1.600
Unit m/s
Property
★
It is used to set the norminal rated speed of the elevator. The value of this parameter is dependent on the elevator mechanism and traction motor.
Note
F0-03 is the actual running speed within the elevator speed range set in F0-04. For example, for a certain elevator, if F0-04 is 1.750 m/s and the actually required maximum running speed is 1.600 m/s, set F0-03 to 1.600 m/s.
Function Code
F0-05
Parameter Name
Rated elevator load
Setting Range
300–9999
Default
1000
Unit Property kg
★
It is used to set the rated elevator load. This parameter is used for the anti-nuisance function.
Function Code
F0-06
Parameter Name
Maximum frequency
Setting Range
20.00–99.00
Default
50.00
Unit
Hz
Property
★
It is used to set the maximum output frequency of the system. This value must be larger than the rated motor frequency.
Function Code
F0-07
Parameter Name
Carrier frequency
Setting Range
0.5–16.0
Default
6.0
Unit kHz
Property
★
It is used to set the carrier frequency of the controller.
The carrier frequency is closely related to the motor noise during running. When it is generally set above 6 kHz, mute running is achieved. It is recommended to set the carrier frequency to the lowest within the allowable noise, which reduces the controller loss and radio frequency interference.
• If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonics, and the power loss and temperature rise of the motor increase.
- 137 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
• If the carrier frequency is high, power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines.
However, the system has an increase in power loss, temperature rise and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following table.
Table 7-1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment
Carrier frequency
Motor noise
Output current waveform
Motor temperature rise
Controller temperature rise
Leakage current
External radiation interference
Low
Large
Bad
High
Low
Small
Small
High
Small
Good
Low
High
Large
Large
Note
On certain environment conditions (the heatsink temperature is too high), the system will reduce the carrier frequency to provide overheat protection for the controller, preventing the controller from being damaged due to overheat. If the temperature cannot reduce in this case, the controller reports the overheat fault.
Group F1: Motor Parameter
Function Code Parameter Name
F1-00 Encoder type
Setting Range
0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental encoder
Default Unit Property
0 -
★
It is used to set the encoder type matching the motor.
When F1-25 is set to 1 (Synchronous motor), set this parameter correctly before autotuning; otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
When F1-25 is set to 0 (Asynchronous motor), this parameter is automatically changed to 2.
You need not modify it manually.
Function
Code
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
Parameter Name
Rated motor power
Rated motor voltage
Rated motor current
Setting Range
0.7–75.0
0–600
0.00–655.00
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Unit kW
V
A
Property
★
★
★
- 138 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-04
F1-05
Rated motor frequency
Rated motor rotational speed
0.00–99.00
0–3000
Model dependent
Model dependent
Hz
RPM
★
★
Set these parameters according to the motor nameplate.
Ensure that these motor parameters are set correctly. Incorrect setting affects the motor auto-tuning and the vector control effect.
Function Code
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
Parameter Name
Encoder initial angle
(synchronous motor)
Encoder angle at poweroff (synchronous motor)
Synchronous motor wiring mode
Setting Range Default
0.0–359.9
0.0–359.9
0–15
0
0
0
Unit
Degree
(°)
Degree
(°)
-
Property
★
★
★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.
F1-06 specifies the encoder angle at zero point. After multiple times of auto-tuning, compare the obtained values, and the value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°.
F1-07 specifies the angle of the magnetic pole when the motor is powered off. The value is recorded at power-off and is used for comparison at next power-on.
F1-08 specifies the motor wiring mode, that is, whether the output phase sequence of the drive board is consistent with the UVW phase sequence of the motor. If the value obtained by means of no-load auto-tuning is an even number, the phase sequence is correct. If the value is an odd number, the sequence is incorrect; in this case, exchange any two of UWW phases of the motor.
Note
With-load auto-tuning of the synchronous motor can be performed only when the UVW phase sequence of the motor is consistent with the output phase sequence of the controller.
Function Code
F1-09
Parameter Name
Current filter time
(synchronous motor)
Setting Range Default
0–3 0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set the current filter time, which suppress the periodic vertical jitter. Increase the value in ascending order of 0.5 to achieve the optimum effect.
Function Code
F1-10
Parameter Name
Encoder verification selection
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to set encoder signal verification. This parameter is set by the manufacturer, and you need not modify it generally.
- 139 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code Parameter Name
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
Setting Range
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
Default Unit Property
0 -
★
It is used to select the auto-tuning mode.
"With-load auto-tuning" is static auto-tuning for the asynchronous motor and rotary autotuning for the synchronous motor. "No-load auto-tuning" is complete auto-tuning, by which all motor parameters can be obtained.
When F1-11 is set to 2 (No-load auto-tuning), the motor must be completely disconnected from the load; otherwise, the auto-tuning effect will be affected. When TUNE is displayed on the operation panel, you need to manually release the brake before starting auto-tuning. For details on the auto-tuning process, see the description in section 5.1.
Function Code
F1-12
Parameter Name
Encoder pulses per revolution
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–10000 2048 PPR
★
It is used to set the pulses per revolution of the encoder (according to the encoder nameplate).
This parameter is critical to CLVC. Set the encoder nominal value in this parameter.
Otherwise, the elevator may not run properly. When the feedback pulses received by the system is data after frequency division by other equipment, set the frequency-division value rather than the encoder nominal value in this parameter. For example, if the pulses per revolution of the encoder is 8192 and is sent to the system after 1/4 frequency division, set this parameter to 2048 (8192/4 = 2048).
F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), F1-05 (Rated motor rotational speed), and F1-12 (Encoder pulses per revolution) determine whether the elevator can run properly. If any of these parameters is changed, shaft auto-tuning must be performed again.
Function Code
F1-13
Parameter Name
Encoder wire-breaking detection time
Setting Range
0–10.0
Default
1.0
Unit s
Property
★
This parameter is used to set the time that a wire-break fault lasts before being detected.
After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, if there is no encoder signal input within the time set in this parameter, the system prompts the encoder fault and stops running.
When the value is smaller than 0.5s, this function is disabled.
Function Code
F1-14
F1-15
F1-16
Parameter Name
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
Leakage inductance
(asynchronous motor)
Setting Range
0.000–30.000
0.000–30.000
0.00–300.00
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Unit Property
Ω
★
Ω mH
★
★
- 140 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
F1-17
F1-18
Parameter Name
Mutual inductance
(asynchronous motor)
Magnetizing current
(asynchronous motor)
Setting Range
0.1–3000.0
0.01–300.00
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
Unit Property mH
A
★
★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. After the motor auto-tuning is completed successfully, the values of these parameters are updated automatically.
If motor auto-tuning cannot be performed onsite, manually enter the values by referring to data of the motor with the same nameplate parameters.
Each time F1-01 (Rated motor power) of the asynchronous motor is modified, these parameters automatically resume to the default values for the standard motor.
Function Code
F1-19
F1-20
F1-21
Parameter Name
Shaft Q inductance (torque)
Shaft D inductance (excitation)
Back EMF
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0.00–650.00
0.00–650.00
0–65535
3.00
3.00
0 mH mH
-
★
★
★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name
F1-25 Motor type
Setting Range
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
Default
1
Unit Property
-
★
It is used to set the motor type. This parameter must be set correctly before motor autotuning; otherwise, the motor auto-tuning cannot be performed.
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Function Code
F2-00
F2-01
F2-02
Parameter Name
Speed loop proportional gain KP1
Speed loop integral time TI1
Switchover frequency 1
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–100 40 -
★
0.01–10.00
0.00 to F2-05
0.60
2.00
s
Hz
★
★
F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than the value of F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1).
Function Code
F2-03
F2-04
F2-05
Parameter Name
Speed loop proportional gain KP2
Speed loop integral time TI2
Switchover frequency 2
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–100 35 -
★
0.01–10.00
0.80
F2-02 to F0-06 5.00
s
Hz
★
★
F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than the value of F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2).
If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters are obtained from the weighted average value of the two groups of PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01 and F2-03, F2-04), as shown in Figure 7-1.
- 141 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 7-1 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters
PI parameters
F2-00
F2-01
F2-03
F2-04
F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1)
F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2)
Frequency reference (Hz)
The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Increase the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2-
03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function Code
F2-06
F2-07
Parameter Name
Current loop KP1 (torque)
Current loop KI1 (torque)
Setting Range Default Unit
10–500 60 -
10–500 30 -
Property
★
★
These two parameters are regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop.
These parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in vector control. The best values of the parameters matching the motor characteristics are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally.
Function Code
F2-08
Parameter Name
Torque upper limit
Setting Range
0.0–200.0
Default
150.0
Unit
%
Property
★
It is used to set the torque upper limit of the motor. The value 100% corresponds to the rated output torque of the adaptable motor.
Property
★
Function Code
F2-10
Parameter Name
Elevator running direction
It is used to set the elevator running direction.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Direction unchanged
• 1: Direction reversed
Setting Range Default Unit
0–1 0 -
- 142 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
You can modify this parameter to reverse the running direction (without changing the wiring of the motor).
When you perform inspection running for the first time after motor auto-tuning is successful, check whether the actual motor running direction is consistent with the inspection command direction. If not, change the motor running direction by setting F2-10 to consistent with the inspection command direction.
Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the default setting.
Function Code
F2-11
F2-12
F2-13
Parameter Name
Zero servo current coefficient
Zero servo speed loop KP
Zero servo speed loop KI
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0.20–50.0
15 -
★
0.00–2.00
0.00–2.00
0.5
0.6
-
-
★
★
These parameters are used to adjust automatic pre-torque compensation in the case of noload-cell. The no-load-cell startup function is enabled when F8-01 is set to 2.
Decrease the values of these parameters in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase the values in the case of rollback at startup. For details, see the description of section 5.1.5.
Function Code
F2-16
F2-17
Parameter Name
Torque acceleration time
Torque deceleration time
Setting Range Default
1–500 1
1–500 350
Unit ms ms
Property
★
★
These two parameters are used to set the acceleration time and deceleration time of the torque current.
Due to different characteristics, the motor may have an abnormal sound when the current is withdrawn at stop. In this case, you can increase the torque deceleration time properly to eliminate the abnormal sound.
Function Code
F2-18
Parameter Name
Startup acceleration time
Setting Range
0.000–1.500
Default
0.000
Unit Property s
★
It is used to set the acceleration time of the startup speed. It is used with F3-00. For details, see Figure 7-2.
Group F3: Running Control Parameters
Function Code
F3-00
F3-01
Parameter Name
Startup speed
Startup holding time
Setting Range
0.000–0.030
0.000–0.500
Default
0.000
0.000
Unit m/s s
Property
★
★
These two parameters are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time.
For details, see Figure 7-2.
The parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup due to static friction between the guide rail and the guide shoes.
- 143 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F3-02
F3-03
F3-04
Parameter Name
Acceleration rate
Acceleration start jerk time
Acceleration end jerk time
Setting Range
0.200–1.500
0.300–4.000
0.300–4.000
Default
0.600
2.500
2.500
Unit Property m/s 2
★ s s
★
★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during acceleration of the elevator.
Function Code
F3-05
F3-06
F3-07
Parameter Name
Deceleration rate
Setting Range Default
0.200–1.500
0.600
Deceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000
Deceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000
2.500
2.500
Unit m/s 2 s s
Property
★
★
★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during deceleration of the elevator.
• F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) in the straight-line acceleration process (deceleration process) of the S curve.
• F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the rate to increase from 0 to the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) in the end jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
• F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) to 0 in the start jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
Figure 7-2 Setting the running curve
V (speed)
F3-09
F3-04
F3-07
F3-02
F3-05
F3-06
F3-03
F3-01
F2-18
F3-00 t (time)
Function Code
F3-08
Parameter Name
Special deceleration rate
Setting Range
0.200–1.500
Default
0.900
Unit m/s
2
Property
★
It is used to set the deceleration rate in elevator slow-down, inspection, and shaft auto-tuning.
This parameter is not used during normal running. It is used only when the elevator position is abnormal or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal.
Function Code
F3-09
Parameter Name
Pre-deceleration distance
Setting Range Default Unit
0–90.0
0.0
mm
Property
★
- 144 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
It is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator in distance control, as shown in Figure 7-2. This function is to eliminate the effect of encoder signal loss or leveling signal delay.
Function Code
F3-10
Parameter Name
Re-leveling speed
Setting Range
0.000–0.080
Default
0.040
Unit m/s
Property
★
is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling.
This parameter is valid only when the pre-open module (MCTC-SCB-A) is added to implement the re-leveling function (set in FE-32).
Function Code
F3-11
Parameter Name
Inspection speed
Setting Range
0.100–0.630
Default
0.250
It is used to set the elevator speed during inspection and shaft auto-tuning.
Unit m/s
Property
★
Function Code
F3-12
F3-13
F3-14
F3-15
F3-16
F3-17
Parameter Name
Position of up slow-down 1
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0.000–300.00
0.00
m
★
Position of down slow-down 1 0.000–300.00
Position of up slow-down 2 0.000–300.00
Position of down slow-down 2 0.000–300.00
Position of up slow-down 3 0.000–300.00
Position of down slow-down 3 0.000–300.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
m m m m m
★
★
★
★
★
These parameters specify the positions of all slow-down switches relative to the bottom leveling position, and the positions are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning. For the installation positions of the slow-down switches, see the description of section 3.8.2.
The NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller supports a maximum of three pairs of slowdown switches. From two sides of the shaft to the middle, slow-down 1, slow-down 2, and slow-down 3 are installed in order; that is, slow-down 1 is installed near the terminal floor.
There may be only one pair of slow-sown switches for the low-speed elevator, and two or three pairs of slow-down switches for the high-speed elevator.
The system automatically detects the speed when the elevator reaches a slow-down switch.
If the detected speed or position is abnormal, the system enables the elevator to slow down at the special deceleration rate set in F3-08, preventing over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal.
Function Code
F3-18
F3-19
F3-20
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000
0.200
s
★
Brake release delay
Zero-speed control time at end
0.000–2.000
0.000–1.000
0.600
0.300
s s
★
★
These parameters are used to set the time related to the zero-speed holding current output and braking action delay.
• F3-18 (Zero-speed control time at startup) specifies the time from output of the RUN contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation on the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
- 145 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
• F3-19 (Brake release delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
• F3-20 (Zero-speed control time at end) specifies the zero-speed output time when the running curve ends.
• F8-11 (Brake apply delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
Figure 7-3 Running time sequence
V (speed)
F3-19
F3-18
F3-20
F8-11
F2-17
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Shorting door lock circuit contactor
Shorting motor stator contactor
Internal running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator contactor t (time)
Function Code
F3-21
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Low-speed re-leveling speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100
m/s
★
It is used to set the elevator speed of returning to the leveling position at normal non-leveling stop.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
F3-22
Acceleration rate at emergency evacuation
0.100–1.300
0.100
It is used to set the acceleration rate at emergency evacuation.
Unit m/s
2
Property
★
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-24
Program function selection
0: Reserved
1: Slip experiment enabled
0 -
★
This parameter is used when the motor slip experiment is performed during elevator acceptance. If the slip experiment onsite is not successful, set this parameter to 1 to enable the slip experiment function. After the experiment is completed, restore the parameter to disable the function.
- 146 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Group F4: Floor Parameters
Function Code
F4-00
Parameter Name
Leveling adjustment
Setting Range
0–60
Default
30
Unit mm
Property
★
It is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at elevator stop. If over-leveling occurs at all floors during elevator stop, decrease the value of this parameter properly. If under-leveling occurs at all floors during elevator stop, increase the value of this parameter properly.
This parameter takes effect to leveling of all floors. Therefore, if leveling at a single floor is inaccurate, adjust the position of the leveling plate.
The NICE3000 new has the advanced distance control algorithm and adopts many methods to ensure reliability of direct travel ride. Generally you need not modify this parameter.
Function Code Parameter Name
F4-01 Current floor
Setting Range
F6-01 to F6-00
Default
1
Unit
-
Property
★
This parameter indicates the current floor of the elevator car.
The system automatically changes the value of this parameter during running, and corrects it at leveling position (door open limit) after the up slow-down and down slow-down switches act. At non-bottom floor and top-floor leveling, you can also manually modify this parameter, but the value must be consistent with the actual current floor.
Function Code
F4-02
F4-03
Parameter Name
High byte of current floor position
Low byte of current floor position
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535
0–65535
1 Pulses
34464 Pulses
●
●
These two parameters indicate the absolute pulses of the current position of the elevator car relative to the bottom leveling position.
The position data of the NICE3000 new
in the shaft is recorded in pulses. Each position is expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the floor position, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the floor position.
Function Code
F4-04
F4-05
Parameter Name
Length 1 of leveling plate
Length 2 of leveling plate
Setting Range Default
0–65535 0
0–65535 0
Unit mm mm
Property
★
★
These two parameters respectively indicate the pulses corresponding to the length of the magnetic value and the length between two leveling sensors. They are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning.
Function Code
F4-06
F4-07
F4-82
F4-83
Parameter Name
High byte of floor height 1
Setting Range Default
0–65535 0
0 Low byte of floor height 1 0–65535
…(Floor height 2 to floor height 38)
High byte of floor height 39 0–65535
Low byte of floor height 39 0–65535
0
0
Unit
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Pulses
Property
★
★
★
★
- 147 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
These parameters indicate the pulses corresponding to the floor height i (between the leveling plates of floor n and floor i+1). Each floor height is expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the floor height, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the floor height. On normal conditions, the floor height i of each floor is almost the same.
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters
Function Code
F5-00
Parameter Name
Attendant/Automatic switchover time
Setting Range Default Unit
3–200 3 s
Property
★
If there is a hall call at current floor in attendant state, the system automatically switches over to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in this parameter. After this running is completed, the system automatically restores to the attendant state (Bit2 of F6-43 must be set to 1). When the value of this parameter is smaller than 5, this function is disabled, and the system is in the normal attendant state.
Function Code
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-23
F5-24
Parameter Name
X1 function selection
X2 function selection
X3 function selection
…
X23 function selection
X24 function selection
Setting Range
0–127
Default
33
35
34
00
00
These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals X1 to X24.
-
···
-
-
Unit
-
-
Property
★
★
★
★
★
Note
Functions 04/36 (Safety circuit feedback NO/NC input), 05/37 (Door lock circuit feedback NO/NC input), 06/38 (Main contactor feedback NO/NC input), 07/39 (Brake feedback contactor NO/NC input), 26/58 (Brake contactor feedback 2 NO/NC input) can be repeatedly allocated to the input terminals.
Terminals X1 to X24 are digital inputs, and are allocated with corresponding functions based on the input signals. All these terminals share the COM terminal. After the 24 V voltage is input, the corresponding input terminal indicator becomes ON. The functions are described as follows:
00: Invalid
Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function.
01: Up leveling signal 02: Down leveling signal 03: Door zone signal
The NICE3000 new
system determines the elevator leveling position based on the leveling sensor signal. The system supports three types of leveling configuration: single door zone sensor, up and down leveling sensors, and door zone sensor plus the up/down leveling sensor.
- 148 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
The following table describes the sequence of received signals for the three types of leveling configurations.
Leveling Configuration
Up leveling sensor
Down leveling sensor
Door zone sensor
No No Yes
Signal Receiving Sequence
Up direction Down direction
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Door zone signal
Up leveling signal →
Down leveling signal
Up leveling signal →
Door zone signal →
Down leveling signal
Down leveling signal →
Up leveling signal
Down leveling signal
→ Door zone signal → leveling signal
If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or unavailable), the system reports fault Err22.
04: Safety circuit feedback signal 05: Door lock circuit feedback signal
29: Safety circuit 2 feedback signal 31: Door lock circuit 2 feedback signal
The safety circuit is important to safe and reliable running of the elevator, and the door lock circuit ensures that the hall door and car door are closed before the elevator starts to run.
Valid feedback signals of the safety circuit and door lock circuit are necessary to elevator running.
It is recommended that these signals are set to NO input. If they are set to NC input, the system considers the input active even though there is no input. In this case, the actual state of the safety circuit cannot be detected, which may cause potential safety risks.
06: RUN contactor feedback signal 07: Brake contactor feedback signal
26: Brake travel switch input signal 78: Brake travel switch 2 input signal
The system sends commands to the RUN and brake contactors and automatically detects the feedback from the RUN and brake contactors. If the commands and the feedback are inconsistent, the system reports a fault.
08: Inspection signal 09: Inspection up signal 10: Inspection down signal
When the Automatic/Inspection switch is set to the Inspection position, the elevator enters the inspection state; in this case, the system cancels all automatic running including the automatic door operations. When the inspection up signal or inspection down signal is valid, the elevator runs at the inspection speed.
11: Fire emergency signal
When the fire emergency switch is turned on, the elevator enters the fire emergency state, and immediately cancels the registered hall calls and car calls. The elevator stops at the nearest floor without opening the door, and then directly runs to the fire emergency floor and automatically opens the door after arrival.
12: Up limit signal 13: Down limit signal
The up limit signal and down limit signal are used as the stop switches at the terminal floor to prevent over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal when the elevator runs over the leveling position of the terminal floor but does not stop.
- 149 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
14: Overload signal
When the elevator load exceeds 110% of the rated load during normal use, the elevator enters the overload state. Then the overload buzzer beeps, the overload indicator in the car becomes ON, and the elevator door keeps open. The overload signal becomes invalid when the door lock is applied. If the running with 110% of the rated load is required during inspection, you can set F7-06 to 1 to allow overload running (note that this function has potential safety risks and use it with caution).
It is recommended that the overload signal be set to NC input. If it is set to NO, the system cannot detect the overload state when the overload switch is damaged or the connection is broken, and the elevator running in this case may cause potential safety risks. It is also recommended that the up limit signal, down limit signal, and slow-down signal are set to NC.
15: Full-load signal
When the elevator load is 80% to 110% of the rated load, the HOP displays the full-load state, and the elevator does not respond to hall calls.
Note
When terminal X on the MCB is used for input of the overload and full-load signals, ensure that
F5-36 has been set to 0.
16: Up slow-down 1 signal 17: Down slow-down 1 signal
18: Up slow-down 2 signal 19: Down slow-down 2 signal
20: Up slow-down 3 signal 21: Down slow-down 3 signal
The slow-down signals are used to enable the elevator to stop at the slow-down speed when the car position is abnormal, which is an important method to guarantee elevator safety. The system automatically records the positions of the switches in group F3 during shaft autotuning.
22: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
It is the feedback signal when the door lock circuit is shorted at if the function of door preopen upon arrival or re-leveling at door open is enabled for the elevator configured with the pre-open module. This is to ensure safety during the elevator running.
23: Firefighter switch signal
It is the firefighter switch signal and is used to enable the firefighter running. After the elevator returns to the fire emergency floor, the elevator enters the firefighter running state if the firefighter signal is active.
24: Door machine 1 light curtain signal 25: Door machine 2 light curtain signal
They are used to detect the light curtain signals of door machine 1 and door machine 2 (if existing).
27: UPS valid signal
It is the emergency running signal at power failure. If it is active, it indicates that the elevator is running for emergency evacuation at power failure. For more details, see section 5.2.1.
- 150 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
28: Elevator lock signal
If this signal is active, the elevator enters the locked state, returns to the elevator lock floor and does not respond to any calls until the signal becomes inactive. It has the same function as the hall call elevator lock signal.
30: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal
The shorting PMSM stator contactor protects the elevator from falling at high speed in the case of brake failure. This signal is used to monitor whether the shorting PMSM stator contactor is normal.
65: Door machine 1 safety edge signal 66: Door machine 2 safety edge signal
They are used to detect the safety edge signal state of door machine 1 and door machine 2
(if existing).
67: Motor overheat signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the controller stops output and reports fault Err39 to prompt motor overheat. After this signal becomes inactive, Err39 is reset automatically and the system resumes to normal operation.
68: Earthquake signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the elevator enters the earthquake stop state, stops at the nearest landing floor and opens the door. Then the elevator starts running again after the earthquake signal becomes inactive.
69: Back door forbidden signal
If double door machines are applied, it is used to prohibit the use of door machine 2.
70: Light-load signal
It is used for nuisance judgment in the anti-nuisance function. If Bit2 in F8-08 is set to 1, the system performs nuisance judgment by using the light-load switch. The load below 30% of the rated load is regarded as light load.
71: Half-load signal
It is used for allocation of elevators in parallel or group mode and judgment of the emergency running direction at power failure.
72: Fire emergency floor switchover signal
76: Door 1 open input 77: Door 2 open input
The NICE3000 new supports two fire emergency floors. By default, the elevator stops at fire emergency floor 1 in fire emergency state. If this signal is active, the elevator stops at fire emergency floor 2 in fire emergency state.
Function Code
F5-25
Parameter Name
CTB input type
Setting Range
0–511
Default
320
Unit
-
It is used to define the input signal type (NO/NC) of the CTB by binary bit.
For example, the input signal types of the CTB of an elevator are set as follows:
Property
★
- 151 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit Parameter Name
Bit0 Door machine 1 light curtain
Bit1 Door machine 2 light curtain
Bit2 Door machine 1 open limit
Bit3 Door machine 2 open limit
Bit4 Door machine 1 close limit
Default
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Parameter Name
Bit5 Door machine 2 close limit
Bit6 Full-load signal (digital)
Bit7 Overload signal (digital)
Bit8 Light-load signal (digital)
0: NC input; 1: NO input
Default
0
1
0
1
Function Code
F5-26
F5-27
F5-28
F5-29
F5-30
F5-31
Parameter Name
Y1 function selection
Y2 function selection
Y3 function selection
Y4 function selection
Y5 function selection
Y6 function selection
Setting Range
0–31
Default
1
2
3
4
0
0
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of relay output terminals Y1 to Y6.
00: Invalid
The terminal has no function.
01: RUN contactor control 02: Brake contactor control 03: Shorting door lock circuit contactor control
The terminal with one of these functions controls whether the contactor is opened or closed.
04: Fire emergency floor arrival signal feedback
In the fire emergency state, the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring after the elevator stops at the fire emergency floor.
05: Door machine 1 open 06: Door machine 1 close 07: Door machine 2 open
08: Door machine 2 close
The terminal with one of these functions is used to control open and close of door 1 or 2.
09: Brake and RUN contactors healthy
When the brake and RUN contactors operate properly (non-Err36/Err37 state), the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring.
10: Fault state
The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the level-3, level-4 or level-5 fault state.
11: Running monitor
The terminal with the function has output when the controller is running.
12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
When the shorting PMSM stator contactor is applied in synchronous motor, the terminal with the function is used to control whether the contactor is closed or opened. For details, see section 5.2.1.
- 152 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover
When detecting that the bus voltage declines to a certain value after power failure occurs on the mains supply, the controller outputs this signal and uses the battery for temporary power supply, implementing emergency evacuation running.
Only Y6/M6 can be allocated with this function because the controller needs to depend on its residual power to drive the relay at power failure of the mains supply.
14: System healthy
The terminal with the function has output when the system operates properly.
15: Emergency buzzer control
The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the emergency evacuation running state. The buzzer tweets to prompt.
16: Higher-voltage startup of brake
This function is used for the brake that keeps the release state with voltage reduction. The terminal with this function keeps the output for 4s to release the brake, and then the voltage is reduced to keep the brake release state.
17: Elevator running in up direction
The terminal with the function has output when the elevator runs in the up direction.
18: Lamp/Fan running
It is used for the lamp/fan running output, the same as the energy saving control output of the CTB.
19: Medical sterilization
It is used to control the output of the ultraviolet sterilizing lamp signal. After the elevator stops running and the lamp/fan stops operating, the medical sterilization output is started.
20: Non-door zone stop
The terminal with this function has output when the elevator stops at the non-door zone.
21: Electric lock
It is used to control applying and releasing of the electric lock in the case of manual door.
22: Non-service state
It is output when the elevator is in the non-service state and cannot respond to hall calls.
Function Code Parameter Name
F5-32
Communication state display
Setting Range
Monitoring of CANbus and
Modbus communication states
Default Unit Property
-
●
It is used to monitor the state of CANbus communication with the CTB and Modbus communication with the HOP.
When you enter the menu of F5-32, the LEDs on the operation panel indicate the current
HOP communication state. The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
- 153 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 7-4 Communication state monitoring
5
A
4
A
F B F B F
3
A
2
A
1
A
B F B F B
E
G
C
DP
E
G
D D
Monitoring CANbus communication status
between the CTB and the MCB
C
DP
E
G
D
C
DP
E
G
D
C
DP
E
G
D
Monitoring Modbus communication status between the HOPs at all floors and the MCB
C
DP
Each segment of the LEDs is defined in the following table.
Table 7-2 Definition of LED segments
LED
No.
1
2
3
4
LED
No.
A B
Corresponding Normal Modbus
Communication Address of LED
C D E F G DP
1
9
2
10
3
11
17 18 19
4 5 6 7
12 13 14 15
20 21 22 23
8
16
24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved
Corresponding Abnormal Modbus
Communication Address of LED
A B C D E F G DP
1
2
3
4
LED
No.
1 2 3
9 10 11
17 18 19
25 26 27
4 5 6 7
12 13 14 15
20 21 22 23
8
16
24
28 29 30 31 Reserved
CTB CANbus Communication State
Best
communication status
Communication interrupted
Meaning of Segment ON
HOP Modbus Communication
Normal
A
F
E
G
D
B
C
DP
Meaning of Segment OFF
HOP Modbus Communication
Abnormal
A
F
E
Number Displayed by the LED
F
G
D
A
B
C
DP
B
5
Communication status from strong to weak
E
G
D
C
DP
For example, if the LEDs are shown as the following figure, it indicates that the Modbus communication of addresses 1, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 27 are abnormal. The Modbus communication of other addresses is normal. The CANbus communication state displayed by the LED is 3, indicating normal communication.
- 154 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Figure 7-5 Example of LED display indicating the communication state
25 17 9 1
30
31
26 14
23
18 14
15
10 6
7
2
29
28
27 13
DP 20
19 13
24 12
11
16
5
4
3
8
Function Code
F5-33
Parameter Name
Terminal program control
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to set the elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated by a binary bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-3 Functions indicated by bits of F5-33
Bit
Bit3
Bit6
Bit8
Bit9
Elevator fire emergency requirement for Hong
Kong
Function
Door lock disconnected at inspection switched over to normal running
Description
If it is enabled, the fire emergency functions in
F6-44 applied to Hong Kong become enabled automatically.
The arrival gong is disabled from 22:00 p.m. to
7:00 a.m.
The door lock is additionally disconnected once when the inspection state is switched over to the normal running state.
The keypad does not blink to display the fault code.
Default
0
0
0
0
Door open command cancelled immediately at door open limit
The system immediately cancels the door open command after receiving the door open limit.
Car stop and zero-speed torque holding at abnormal brake feedback
When the brake feedback is abnormal, the elevator arrives at the door-zone position and stops. The door keeps closed, and the system holds torque output as long as possible. After the system is overloaded, there is no torque output, and the elevator may fall in this case. Be cautious of using this function.
0
0
Function Code
F5-34
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
●
● F5-35 -
These parameters are used to monitor the state of all I/O terminals of the system.
The LEDs of F5-34/F5-35 are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
- 155 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Figure 7-6 Monitoring of all I/O terminals
5
A
4
A
F B F B F
E
G
D
C
DP
E
G
D
C
DP
E
3
A
G
D
B F
C
DP
E
2
A
G
D
Each segment of the LEDs is defined in the following table.
Table 7-4 Definition of LED segments
B F
C
DP
E
1
A
G
D
B
C
DP
No. Segment
A
1
2
3
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
F5-34
Indication
-
Up leveling signal
Down leveling signal
Door zone signal
Safety circuit feedback 1
Door lock circuit feedback 1
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback 1
Inspection signal
Inspection up signal
Inspection down signal
Fire emergency signal
Up limit signal
Down limit signal
Overload signal
Full-load signal
Up slow-down 1 signal
Down slow-down 1 signal
Up slow-down 2 signal
Down slow-down 2 signal
Up slow-down 3 signal
Down slow-down 3 signal
Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
Firefighter running signal
No. Segment
A
1
2
3
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
F5-35
Indication
Light curtain 1
Light curtain 2
Door 1 open limit
Door 2 open limit
Door 1 close limit
Door 2 close limit
Full-load signal
Overload signal
Door open button
Door close button
Door open delay button
Direct travel ride signal
Attendant signal
Direction change signal
Independent running signal
Firefighter operation signal
Door open output 1
Door close output 1
Door lock signal
Door open output 1
Door close output 2
Door lock signal
G Up arrival gong
DP Down arrival gong
- 156 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
No. Segment
A
4
B
C
D
E
F
5
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
DP
F5-34
Indication
Door machine 1 light curtain
Door machine 2 light curtain
Brake contactor feedback 2
UPS input
Elevator lock input
Safety circuit feedback 2
Shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback
Door lock circuit feedback 2
Reserved
RUN contactor output
Brake contactor output
Shorting door lock circuit contactor control
Fire emergency floor arrival signal
-
-
No. Segment
A
4
B
C
D
E
F
F5-35
Indication
Door open button display
Door close button display
Door open delay button display
Non-door zone stop
Reserved
Buzzer output
G Reserved
5
DP
A
B
C
D
Energy saving sign
System light curtain state 1
System light curtain state 2
Hall call elevator lock input
Hall call fire emergency input
E
F
DP
Full-load signal
Overload signal
-
Function Code
F5-36
Parameter Name
Load cell input selection
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–3 1 -
★
It is used to set the channel of setting the elevator load cell signal. When a load cell device is used, set this parameter correctly first.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Invalid
• 1: CTB digital input
• 2: CTB analog input
• 3: MCB analog input
Function Code
F5-37
F5-38
F5-39
Parameter Name Setting Range
X25 function selection 0: No function
X26 function selection 4: Safety circuit signal
X27 function selection
5: Door lock circuit signal
Default Unit Property
0 -
★
0
0
-
-
★
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of heavy-current detection input terminals
X25 to X27.
The functions 0, 4, and 5 can be repeatedly allocated to terminals. If X25 to X27 are not used, cancel the setting of these parameters.
- 157 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters
Function Code
F6-00
F6-01
Parameter Name
Top floor of the elevator
Bottom floor of the elevator
Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-01 to 40 9 -
★
1 to F6-00 1 -
★
These two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator, determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates.
Function Code
F6-02
Parameter Name
Parking floor
Setting Range
F6-01 to F6-00
Default
1
Unit
-
Property
★
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the value set in F9-00, the elevator returns to the parking floor automatically.
Function Code
F6-03
Parameter Name
Fire emergency floor
Setting Range
F6-01 to F6-00
Default
1
Unit
-
Property
★
When entering the state of returning to the fire emergency floor, the elevator returns to this floor.
Function Code
F6-04
Parameter Name
Elevator lock floor
Setting Range
F6-01 to F6-00
Default
1
When entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to this floor.
Unit
-
Property
★
Function Code Parameter Name
F6-05
F6-06
F6-35
Service floors 1
Service floors 2
Service floors 3
Setting Range
0–65535 (floors 1–16)
0–65535 (floors 17–32)
0–65535 (floors 33–40)
Default Unit Property
65535
65535
65535
-
-
-
★
★
★
These parameters are used to set the service floors among floors 1–40. F6-05 (Service floors 1) corresponds to floors 1–16. F6-06 (Service floors 2) corresponds to floors 17–32.
F6-35 (Service floors 3) corresponds to floors 33–40.
Set these parameters as follows:
Whether service floors of a parameter are allowed is indicated by a 16-bit binary number.
The 16 bits respectively correspond to 16 floors from low to high. "1" indicates that the elevator will respond to calls of this floor, and "0" indicates that the elevator will not respond to calls of this floor.
For example, the service floors of a 16-floor elevator are listed in the following table.
Table 7-5 Service floors of a 16-floor elevator
Bit Floor
Bit0 Floor 1
Bit1 Floor 2
Whether Service Setting Bit
Allowed
Forbidden
1
0
Bit8
Floor
Floor 9
Bit9 Floor 10
Whether Service Setting
Forbidden
Allowed
0
1
- 158 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Bit Floor Whether Service Setting Bit Floor Whether Service Setting
Bit2 Floor 3
Bit3 Floor 4
Bit4 Floor 5
Bit5 Floor 6
Bit6 Floor 7
Bit7 Floor 8
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Forbidden
1
1
0
1
1
1
Bit10 Floor 11
Bit11 Floor 12
Bit12 Floor 13
Bit13 Floor 14
Bit14 Floor 15
Bit15 Floor 16
Allowed
Forbidden
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
The binary number indicated by the preceding table is 1111011001111101. The decimal equivalent of this binary number is 63101. Then set F6-05 to 63101.
1
1
1
1
0
1
Function Code
F6-07
Parameter Name
Number of elevators in parallel/group mode
Elevator No.
Setting Range
1–8
Default
1
Unit
-
Property
★
F6-08 1–8 1 -
★
These parameters are used to set the number of elevators and elevator No. in parallel/group mode.
Note
• If F6-07 is set to 1, the setting of F6-08 becomes invalid.
• Elevator No.1 is the master elevator in parallel/group mode and completes the most parallel logics.
Function Code
F6-09
Parameter Name
Elevator program control
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to select the required elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated by a binary bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-6 Functions indicated by bits of F6-09
Bit
Bit0
Bit3
Function
Dispersed waiting
Parallel/Group control implemented at CAN2
Description
In single elevator or parallel/group mode, if this function is enabled, an idle elevator will not return to the base floor.
In group mode, this function is used together with the group control board to implement dispersed waiting.
This function is enabled when the parallel/group mode is implemented at CAN2.
Default
0
0
- 159 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit
Bit4
Bit6
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit14
Function
Group control in compatibility with
NICE3000
Clear floor number and display direction in advance
Single hall call button
Not detecting analog wire breaking
Err30 judgment at releveling cancellation
Time interval detection of safety circuit 2 and door lock circuit 2
Description
This function is used when the NICE3000 is involved in the group control system. The setting of this bit must be the same as that for all the other elevators in the group.
The displayed floor number is cleared before the elevator reaches the target floor.
If the elevator needs to change the direction, the changed direction is displayed in advance.
It is applied to applications where there is only one hall call button.
The system does not detect analog wire breaking during normal running.
It indicates Err30 judgment when re-leveling is cancelled.
If the states of safety circuits 1 and 2 or the states of door lock circuits 1 and 2 are inconsistent, the system will prohibit running. After the states restore normal, the system is powered on again and starts running.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
Function Code
F6-10
Parameter Name
Leveling sensor filter time
Setting Range Default
10–50 14
Unit ms
Property
★
It indicates the delay time from the moment when the leveling sensor acts to the moment when the leveling signal becomes active. You need not modify it.
Function Code
F6-11
Parameter Name
Elevator function selection
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 8448 -
★
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-7 Functions indicated by bits of F6-11
Default Bit
Bit1
Bit2
Bit5
Function
Disabling returning to base floor for verification
Cancelling auto sequential arrange of hall call floor addresses to be displayed
Current detection valid at startup for synchronous motor
Description
The function of returning to base floor for verification due to large deviation of the car position is disabled.
If the display of a floor in group FE is set to 1, the following floors to be displayed are automatically arranged in the ascending order.
The controller performs output current detection when the synchronous motor is started up. If the current is abnormal, the output will be locked and the running will be forbidden.
0
0
0
- 160 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Bit
Bit7
Bit8
Function
Door open valid at non-door zone in the inspection state
Door open and close once after inspection turned to normal
Description
After this function is enabled, the MCB lamp output logic is reversed.
In the inspection state, you can open/close the door by pressing the door open/close button at the non-door zone.
The elevator door opens and closes once after the system turns from first-time inspection to normal running.
Default
0
0
1
Bit12 Fault auto reset
The buzzer inside the car does not tweet upon releveling.
The controller cannot perform shaft-tuning if the floor height is less than 500 mm. After this function is enabled, shaft-tuning can be performed normally.
The controller automatically resets the faults once every hour.
0
0
0
Bit14
Bit15
When Err53 is reported, if the conditions of door open limit valid and door lock release are satisfied, the controller resets Err53 automatically. A maximum of three times of auto reset is allowed.
Up slow-down not reset for super short floor
Down slow-down not reset for super short floor
If this function is enabled, the up slow-down 1 signal does not reset floor display. The down slow-down 1 signal still resets floor display. This is valid only when the customized super short floor function is enabled.
If this function is enabled, the down slow-down 1 signal does not reset floor display. The up slow-down 1 signal still resets floor display. This is valid only when the customized super short floor function is enabled.
1
0
0
Function Code
F6-12
Parameter Name
VIP floor
Setting Range
0 to F6-00
Default
0
It is used to set the VIP floor. For details, see section 5.2.4.
Unit
-
Property
★
Function Code
F6-13
Parameter Name
Security floor
Setting Range
0 to F6-00
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set the security floor of the elevator. If the security signal is active or it is during the night security period, the elevator runs to the security floor first every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the target floor.
The elevator can be made to stop at the security floor in the following two ways:
• Fd-07/Fd-08 is set to 5 (Security signal). If the security signal is active, the elevator enters the security state.
• The night security floor function is enabled (FE-32 Bit5 = 2), the elevator enters the security state from 22:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m.
- 161 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F6-14
F6-15
F6-16
F6-17
Parameter Name
Start time of down collective selective 1
End time of down collective selective 1
Start time of down collective selective 2
End time of down collective selective 2
Setting Range
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
Default
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
Unit
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
These four parameters define the time periods of down collective selective 1 and down collective selective 2, during which, the elevator responds to only downward hall calls.
Function Code
F6-18
F6-19
F6-20
F6-21
F6-36
F6-22
F6-23
F6-24
F6-25
F6-37
Parameter Name
Start time of time-based floor service 1
End time of time-based floor service 1
Service floor 1 of timebased floor service 1
Service floor 2 of timebased floor service 1
Service floor 3 of timebased floor service 1
Start time of time-based floor service 2
End time of time-based floor service 2
Service floor 1 of timebased floor service 2
Service floor 2 of timebased floor service 2
Service floor 3 of timebased floor service 2
Setting Range
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Default
00.00
00.00
65535
65535
65535
00.00
00.00
65535
65535
65535
Unit
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
HH.MM
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
These parameters define the time periods of two groups of time-based services and corresponding service floors.
Service floor 1 corresponds to floors 1–16, service floor 2 corresponds to floors 17–32, and service floor 3 corresponds to floors 33–30.
In the time period of time-based service 1 (set by F6-18 and F6-19), the elevator responds to the service floors set by F6-20, F6-21 and F6-36 but ignores the service floors set by F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35. The setting of time-based service floors is the same as that of service floors in F6-05.
Note
During the time-based floor service period, the settings of F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35 are invalid.
If the two periods of time-based floor service 1 and time-based floor service 2 are overlapped, the system implements time-based floor service 1 because it has higher priority level.
- 162 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
F6-26
F6-27
F6-28
F6-29
F6-30
F6-31
Parameter Name
Peak 1 start time
Peak 1 end time
Peak 1 floor
Peak 2 start time
Peak 2 end time
Peak 2 floor
Setting Range
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
F6-01 to F6-00
00.00–23.59
00.00–23.59
F6-01 to F6-00
Default
00.00
00.00
1
00.00
00.00
1
Unit
HH.MM
-
HH.MM
-
HH.MM
HH.MM
Property
☆
☆
★
☆
☆
★
These parameters define two peak time periods in parallel/group mode and corresponding floors. During a peak time period, if there are more than three car calls from the peak floor, the elevator enters the peak service state. At the moment, the car calls from the peak floor are valid all the time. The elevator returns to this floor if it is idle.
Function Code
F6-38
F6-39
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59
Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59
00.00
00.00
Unit
HH.MM
HH.MM
Property
☆
☆
These two parameters define the elevator lock time period, during which automatic elevator lock has the same effect as elevator lock by means of the elevator lock switch.
Function Code
F6-40
F6-41
F6-42
Parameter Name
Program control selection 1
Program control selection 2
Program control selection 3
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 -
★
0–65535
0–65535
0
0
-
-
★
★
These parameters are used to set program control functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-8 Functions indicated by the bits of F6-40 to F6-42
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Function
Disability function
Soft limit function
JP16 input used as back door selection
F6-40 Program Control Selection 1
Description
It is used to enable or disable the disability function.
When the up slow-down and down leveling signals are active and the up leveling signal is inactive, the system considers that the up limit is performed. It is the same for the down limit signal.
This function is enabled if the opposite door function is used. When JP16 has input, the elevator opens only the back door. When IP16 has no input, the elevator opens only the front door.
Default
0
0
0
Bit3
JP16 input used as the back door open signal
JP16 is used for the input of the back door open signal.
0
- 163 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit
Bit4
Bit5
Function
Opening only one door of opposite doors under manual control
Timed elevator lock
F6-40 Program Control Selection 1
Description
This function is enabled only in the opposite door control mode 2 (hall call independent, opposite-door manual control). In this case, only one door opens each time while the other door must stay in the door close limit state.
In group Fd, the HCB-B extended input includes
"Single/Double door selection". If this input is active, both doors open if there is a car call.
F6-38/F6-39 is valid only when this function is enabled.
Bit6 Manual door This function is used for the elevator with manual door.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
Bit7 Reserved
-
Bit8 Reserved
Bit9
Bit12
Bit13
Bit15
-
Disabling reverse floor number clear
The system clears all the current car calls every time the elevator changes the direction by default. When this function is enabled, the function of clearing reverse floor numbers is disabled.
The next floor to be arrived at is displayed during elevator running.
The system responds to hall calls only after executing all car calls.
Car call assisted command in single door used as disability function
Folding command used as disability function and back door function
You can set the auxiliary command terminal (CN8) on the CTB for input of the disability calls (folding command not required).
It is valid only when the function of Bit14 is enabled.
Bit13 = 1: Disability
Bit13 = 0: Back door
Function disabled: CN7 is used for front door calls or ordinary calls, and CN8 is used for back door calls or disability calls.
Function enabled: For CN7 and CN8, inputs 1 to 16 are used for front door calls or ordinary calls, and inputs 17 to 32 are used for back door calls or disability calls.
JP20 used for switchover to back door
JP20 is used for input of switchover between the front door and the back door.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
- 164 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Bit Function
Bit0 Reserved
Bit1 Reserved
Bit3 Reserved
Bit5 Reserved
Bit7 Reserved
F6-41 Program Control Selection 2
Description
-
-
During inspection running, if the slow-down 1 acts, the system decelerates to stop.
-
The buzzer will tweet when the door open delay time set in Fb-14 is reached.
-
Door open delay is cancelled when the door open delay button is pressed again.
-
In the elevator lock state, the elevator keeps the door open at the elevator lock floor.
In the elevator lock state, hall calls are displayed normally.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The elevator is locked properly in the attendant state.
0
Bit11 Blinking at arrival
The car display blinks when the elevator arrives at a floor. The blinking advance time is set in F6-47.
The door re-opens if the door open delay input is active during door close.
Bit13
Door re-open after car call of the present floor
The door re-opens if the car call of the present floor is valid during door close.
Bit Function
Bit0 Reserved
Bit1
Cancelling door open/ close command at delay after door open/ close limit
F6-42 Program Control Selection 3
Description
-
If this function is enabled, the door open/close command is cancelled at the delay of 1s after door open/close limit.
Bit2
Not judging door lock state at door close output
On normal conditions, the system determines that the door is completely closed only when the door close limit signal is active and the door lock is applied.
If this function is enabled, the system need not judge the door lock state.
The door close command is output continuously during the elevator running.
Bit4
Returning to base floor for verification at first-time power-on
The elevator runs to the bottom floor for verification at power-on for the first time.
If the elevator lock signal is active, the elevator clears all car calls and hall calls and lands at the nearest floor.
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
- 165 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F6-43
Parameter Name
Attendant function selection
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to select the attendant-related elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-9 Attendant-related functions indicated by bits of F6-43
Bit
Bit0
Function
Calls cancelled after entering attendant state
F6-43 Attendant Function Selection
Description
All car calls and hall calls are cancelled after the system enters the attendant state for the first time.
The car blinks inside, prompting there is hall call, but the system does not respond.
If this function is enabled, the setting of F5-00
(Attendant/Normal switchover time) is valid.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
Bit5
Bit6
Buzzer tweeting at intervals in attendant state
Continuous buzzer tweeting in attendant state
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are different, the buzzer tweets 2.5s at intervals.
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are different, the buzzer tweets continuously.
When the hall call input is active, the car call button for the corresponding floor blinks to give a prompt.
Function Code
F6-44
Parameter Name
Fire emergency function selection
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
16456
Unit
-
★
0
0
0
Property
It is used to select the fire emergency functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
- 166 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Table 7-10 Fire emergency functions indicated by bits of F6-44
Bit Function
Bit0 to
Bit2 Reserved
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Arrival gong output in inspection or fire emergency state
Multiple car calls registered in fire emergency state
Retentive at power failure in fire emergency state
Bit6
Closing door by holding down the door close button
F6-44 Fire Emergency Function Selection
Description
-
The arrival gong is output in the inspection or fire emergency state.
Multiple car calls can be registered in the fire emergency state. If this function is disabled, only one car call can be registered.
In the fire emergency state, the current system and car state will be memorized at power failure and be resumed after the system is powered on again.
In the fire emergency state, the door close process can be completed only by holding down the door close button until the door close limit is reached. Otherwise, it will be switched over to door open automatically.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
Bit7 Reserved
-
0
The elevator enters the door close process automatically if a car call is registered.
0
0 Hall calls are displayed in the fire emergency state.
JP22 is used for firefighter forced running input.
In the firefighter running state, when the JP22 input switch and the door close button are enabled simultaneously, the buzzer tweets and the system outputs the door close signal. If the door lock is not enabled within 10s, the system outputs the shorting door lock circuit contactor signal, and the elevator starts running (used together with SCB-A).
The system can exit the fire emergency state only after the elevator arrives at the fire emergency floor.
Bit12
Not clearing car calls at reverse door open in firefighter running state
Bit13 Reserved
Bit14
In the firefighter running state, the car calls that have been registered are not cleared at reverse door open.
Opening door by holding down the door open button
-
In the fire emergency state, the door open process can be completed only by holding down the door open button until the door open limit is reached. Otherwise, it will be switched over to door close automatically.
The door opens automatically after the elevator arrives at the fire emergency floor.
0
0
0
0
0
0
- 167 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F6-45
Parameter Name
Emergency evacuation function selection
Setting Range
0–65535
Default Unit Property
0 -
★
It is used to select the emergency evacuation-related functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-11 Emergency evacuation functions indicated by bits of F6-45
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Function
Direction determine mode
Stopping at evacuation parking floor
F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Description
0 Automatically
0 calculating direction
1
0
Load direction determining (based on load cell data or half-load signal)
1
0
Direction of nearest landing floor
During evacuation running, the elevator arrives at the evacuation parking floor set in F6-49 (it must be a non-zero value and is a service floor). Otherwise, the elevator stops at the nearest floor.
Bit3 Reserved -
Bit4
Compensation at startup
The non-load-cell startup is still valid in the process of evacuation running.
Bit5 to
Bit7
Reserved -
Bit8
Bit9
Emergency running time protection
Reserved
If the elevator does not arrive at the required floor after
50s emergency evacuation running time, Err33 is reported.
In this case, the function of switching over shorting stator braking mode to controller drive based on the time setting cannot be implemented.
-
The buzzer tweets at intervals in the emergency evacuation running state.
Bit11 Reserved
Bit12
Shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive
It enables the function of switching over shorting stator braking mode to controller drive.
Bit13
Mode of shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive
0
1
Time setting
If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds
50s, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
Speed setting
If the speed is still smaller than the value of F6-48 after 10s in the shorting stator braking mode, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
- 168 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Bit
Bit14
Bit15
Function
Emergency evacuation exit mode
F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Description
0
1
The system exits emergency evacuation when receiving the door open limit signal from the elevator that arrives at the target floor.
The system exits emergency evacuation when receiving the door close limit signal from the elevator that arrives at the target floor.
Function selection of shorting stator braking mode
It enables the function. When this function is enabled, the setting of related function codes becomes effective.
Default
0
0
Function Code
F6-46
Parameter Name
VIP function selection
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to select the elevator VIP function. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and
"0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-12 VIP functions indicated by bits of F6-46
Bit
Bit0
Bit8
Function
VIP enabled by hall call (at VIP floor)
Bit1
VIP enabled by terminal
Bit2-Bit7 Reserved
Number of VIP car calls limited
F6-46 VIP Function Selection
Description
After this function is enabled, the system enters VIP running.
After the terminal for VIP hall call becomes ON, the system enters VIP running.
-
If this function is enabled, only one car call can be selected simultaneously in the VIP state.
Default
0
0
0
0
Function Code
F6-47
Parameter Name
Blinking advance time
Setting Range Default
0.0–15.0
0
Unit s
Property
☆
It is used to set the blinking advance time when the elevator arrives the floor required by the car call.
Function Code
F6-48
Parameter Name
Emergency evacuation switching speed
Setting Range
0.010–0.630
Default
0.010
Unit Property m/s
★
It is used to set the switching speed at shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive via speed setting.
- 169 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F6-49
Parameter Name
Evacuation parking floor
Setting Range Default
0 to F6-01 0
Unit Property
-
★
It is used to set the evacuation parking floor when Bit2 (Stopping at evacuation parking floor) in F6-45 is enabled.
Group F7: Test Function Parameters
This group of parameters is specialized for elevator commissioning.
Follow the instructions for normal-speed commissioning:
1. Before the commissioning, ensure that the shaft is unobstructed and the related parameters have been set properly.
2. Run the elevator to the middle floor of the shaft at the inspection speed so as to prevent wrong running direction.
3. Perform single-floor command commissioning and then perform multi-floor command commissioning.
4. After the commissioning is complete, check that the parameters in this group are set properly.
Function Code
F7-00
F7-01
F7-02
Parameter Name
Car call floor registered
Up call floor registered
Down call floor registered
Setting Range
0 to F6-00
0 to F6-00
0 to F6-00
Default
0
0
0
Unit Property
-
-
-
☆
☆
☆
These parameters are used to set the destination floors at elevator commissioning or repairing. They can be respectively used as the car call button, hall call up button and hall call down button. They remain valid after the commissioning command is input, and become invalid until they are set to 0 or the system suffers power failure.
Function Code
F7-03
Parameter Name
Random running times
Setting Range Default
0–60000 0
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is used to set the random running times of the system.
The NICE3000
F7-03 to 0.
new
has the random automatic running function. If the setting of F7-03 is greater than 60000, the system keeps implementing random automatic running until you set
You can set the time interval between two times of random running in F7-08.
Function Code
F7-04
Parameter Name
Hall call enabled
Setting Range
0: Yes
1: No
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is used to enable the hall call function.
• 0: Yes (hall call allowed)
• 1: No (hall call forbidden)
- 170 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
F7-05
Parameter Name
Door open enabled
It is used to enable the door open function.
• 0: Yes (door open allowed)
• 1: No (door open forbidden)
Setting Range
0: Yes
1: No
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
☆
Note
Continuous running of the elevator without opening the door accelerates overheating of the controller module. Long-time use in such mode may cause overheat protection, and therefore, use the function with caution.
Function Code
F7-06
Parameter Name
Overload function
Setting Range
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default
0 -
Unit Property
☆
It is used to enable the overload function.
Note
This function is used only in the heavy-load test. Once the test is complete, prohibit overload running immediately.
Function Code Parameter Name
F7-07 Limit switch
Setting Range
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
It is used to enable the limit switch function.
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
☆
Note
The limit switch is disabled only in the test of the final limit switch. Use the function with caution.
Function Code
F7-08
Parameter Name
Time interval of random running
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–1000 0 s
☆
It is used to set the time interval between two times of random running.
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters
Function Code
F8-00
Parameter Name
Load for load cell auto-tuning
It is used to set the load for load cell auto-tuning.
To perform load cell auto-tuning, do as follows:
Setting Range Default
0–100 0
Unit Property
%
★
- 171 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
1. Ensure that F8-01 is set to 0 and F5-36 is set to 2 or 3 to make the system allow load cell auto tuning.
2. Stop the elevator at any floor, with the car in the no-load state. Set F8-00 to 0 and press
ENTER
.
3. Put N% load in the car. Then set F8-00 to N and press the ENTER key.
For example, if you put 500 kg load in the elevator with rated load of 1000 kg, set F8-00 to 50.
After the load-cell auto-tuning is completed, the corresponding no-load and full-load data will be recorded in F8-06 and F8-07. You can also manually input the data according to the actual situation.
Function Code
F8-01
Parameter Name
Pre-torque selection
Setting Range
0–2
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at startup of the elevator.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Pre-torque invalid
Load cell auto-tuning is allowed.
• 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
With a load cell, the system implements the pre-torque compensation function.
• 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
The system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup without a load cell.
If F8-01 is set to 1, the system outputs the torque matching the load in advance to ensure the riding comfort at startup. The output torque is limited by F2-08 (Torque upper limit).
When the load torque is greater than the set torque upper limit, the output torque of the system is the torque upper limit.
Function Code
F8-02
Parameter Name
Pre-torque offset
Setting Range
0.0–100.0
Default
50.0
Unit
%
Property
★
It is used to set the pre-torque offset. It is actually the balance coefficient of the elevator, indicating the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the counterweight and the car weight are balanced.
Function Code
F8-03
F8-04
Parameter Name
Drive gain
Brake gain
Setting Range
0.00–2.00
0.00–2.00
Default
0.60
0.60
Unit
-
-
Property
★
★
These two parameters are used to set the pre-torque gain when the elevator runs on the drive side or the brake side.
For details, see section 5.1.5.
- 172 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
F8-05
Parameter Name
Current car load
Setting Range
0–1023
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
●
This parameter is readable and reflects the load situation in the car. The value is sampled by the NICE3000 new by using a load cell. This parameter is used to judge overload or full-load, or calculate the torque current for load cell pre-torque compensation.
Function Code
F8-06
F8-07
Parameter Name
Car no-load load
Car full-load load
Setting Range
0–1023
0–1023
Default
0
100
Unit
-
-
Property
★
★
These two parameters respectively specify the car no-load load and full-load load. They are AD sampling values.
Note
If F8-06 = F8-07, the full-load and overload become invalid.
Function Code
F8-08
Parameter Name
Anti-nuisance function
Setting Range
0, 1, 2, 4
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is the criteria for judging whether nuisance exists.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
• 1: Nuisance judged by load cell
A load cell is required. The system judges whether nuisance exists by comparing the load cell data and the number of car calls.
• 2: Nuisance judged by light curtain
The system determines that nuisance exists when the light curtain does not act after the elevator stops at arrival for three consecutive times.
• 4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal
If the light-load signal is active, the system determines that nuisance exists when the number of car calls is greater than a certain value.
When the system determines that the elevator is in the nuisance state, it cancels all car calls. In this case, call calls need to be registered again.
Function Code
F8-09
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure 0.000 to F3-11
0.050
m/s
★
It is used to set the speed for emergency evacuation operation at power failure.
- 173 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F8-10
Parameter Name
Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure
Setting Range Default
0–2 0
It is used to set the emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure.
• 0: Motor not running
• 1: UPS
• 2: 48 V battery power supply
For details, see section 5.2.1.
Unit Property
-
★
Function Code
F8-11
Parameter Name
Brake apply delay
Setting Range
0.200–1.500
Default
0.200
Unit s
Property
★
It is used to set the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied. For details, see Figure 7-3.
Function Code
F8-12
Parameter Name
Fire emergency floor 2
Setting Range
0 to F6-00
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set the second fire emergency floor. The switchover between fire emergency floor 1 and fire emergency floor 2 is implemented by means of input from the MCB. When this signal is input, the elevator enters the fire emergency state and returns to this floor.
Function Code
F8-16
Parameter Name
Start address of hall call auxiliary command
Setting Range Default
0–40 0
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is used to set the start address of hall calls from the back door.
Address of a hall call from the back door = Address of a hall call from the front door at the same floor + F8-16
Function Code
F8-17
Parameter Name
Hall call address check
Setting Range
0–1
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
☆
If it is valid, the HCB no longer displays the current floor information of the car but displays the set address of itself, convenient for inspection in the case of wrong floor address setting.
Group F9: Time Parameters
Function Code
F9-00
Parameter Name
Idle time before returning to base floor
Setting Range
0–240
Default
10
Unit min
Property
☆
It is used to set the idle time of the elevator before returning to the base floor.
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the setting of this parameter, the elevator returns to the base floor.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.
- 174 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
F9-01
Parameter Name
Time for fan and lamp to be turned off
Setting Range
0–240
Default
2
Unit min
Property
☆
It is used to set the time that fan and lamp stays ON before being turned off automatically.
If there is no running command in the automatic running state, the system turns off the fan and lamp automatically after the time set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.
Function Code
F9-02
Parameter Name
Motor running time limit
Setting Range
0–45
Default
45
Unit s
Property
★
It is used to set the running time limit of the motor.
In normal running state, if the continuous motor running time in the same direction between two adjacent floors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling signal is received, the system will perform protection.
This parameter is mainly used for over-time protection in the case of steel rope slipping on the traction sheave.
If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range
F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100
F9-04
F9-05
Clock: month
Clock: day
1–12
1–31
F9-06
F9-07
Clock: hour
Clock: minute
0–23
0–59
Default
Current year
Current month
Current day
Current hour
Current minute
Unit
YYYY
MM
DD
HH
MM
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
These parameters are used to set the current date and time of the system.
Timekeeping is supported at power failure. You need to set the current system time correctly so that functions related to the time can be implemented.
Function Code
F9-09
F9-11
F9-12
Parameter Name
Accumulative running time
High byte of running times
Low byte or running times
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 h
●
0–9999
0–9999
0
0
-
-
●
●
These parameters are used to view the actual accumulative running time and running times of the elevator.
Running times of the elevator = F9-11 x 10000 + F9-12.
- 175 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
F9-13
Parameter Name
Maintenance notification period
Setting Range Default
0–99 0
Unit day
Property
★
It is the forced maintenance notification function. When this parameter is set to a non-zero value, this function is enabled, and the system starts to count the days. If there is no poweroff operation during the counting and the counted days reach the value of this parameter, the elevator enters the parking state and the system reports Err08, notifying that the elevator must be maintained and cannot run. Maintenance personnel need to power off and maintain the elevator, and then the system clears the value to 0 and starts counting again.
If this parameter is set to 0, this function is disabled.
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters
Function Code
FA-00
Parameter Name
Keypad display selection
Setting Range Default
0–3 3
Unit
-
Property
☆
The NICE3000 new
system has three buttons and three 7-segment LEDs on the MCB. You can change the display content through the setting of this parameter.
• 0: Reversed display of physical floor
• 1: Positive display of physical floor
• 2: Reversed display of hall call floor
• 3: Positive display of hall call floor
Function Code
FA-01
Parameter Name
Display in running state
Setting Range
1–65535
Default
65535
Unit Property
-
☆
It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the running state.
A total of 16 running parameters can be displayed during running, each respectively corresponding to the 16 binary bits of FA-01. "1" indicates that the parameter is displayed, while "0" indicates that the parameter is not displayed. You can switch over the displayed parameter by pressing the shift button and set whether to display this parameter according to your own using habit.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the running parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-13 Running parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-01
Bit Parameter Name
Bit0 Running speed
Bit1 Set speed
Bit2 Bus voltage
Bit3 Output voltage
Bit4 Output current
Bit5 Output frequency
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit Parameter Name
Bit8 Output terminal
Bit9 Current floor
Bit10 Current position
Bit11 Car load
Bit12 CTB input state
Bit13 CTB output state
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
- 176 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Bit Parameter Name
Bit6 Input terminal low bits
Bit7 Input terminal high bits
Default
1
1
Bit Parameter Name
Bit14 System state
Bit15 Pre-toque current
Default
1
1
Function Code
FA-02
Parameter Name
Display in stop state
Setting Range
1–65535
Default
65535
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is used to set the parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the stop state.
A total of 16 parameters can be displayed at stop. The use is the same as that of FA-01.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the stop parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-14 Stop parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-02
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Parameter Name
Set speed
Bus voltage
Input terminal low bits
Input terminal high bits
Output terminal
Current floor
Current position
Car load
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit
Bit8
Parameter Name
Slow-down distance at rated speed
Bit9 CTB input state
Bit10 CTB output state
Bit11 System state
Bit12 Reserved
Bit13 Reserved
Bit14 Reserved
Bit15 Reserved
Default
1
The running and stop parameters of the NICE3000 new system are the important references for engineers to perform commissioning on site. The parameters are described as follows:
1) Running speed: indicates the actual running speed of the elevator.
Its maximum value is F0-03 (Maximum running speed), in unit of m/s.
2) Set speed: indicates the set speed of the NICE3000 should run. Its unit is m/s.
new
system during elevator running.
It is the running speed calculated by the system theoretically at which the elevator
3) Bus voltage: indicates the DC bus voltage of the NICE3000 new system, in unit of m/s.
4) Output voltage: indicates the effective value of the equivalent voltage of the PWM wave output by the NICE3000 new
system, in unit of V.
5) Output current: indicates the effective value of the actual current when the NICE3000 new system drives the motor to turn, in unit of A.
6) Output frequency: indicates the actual frequency of the motor during running. It has a fixed corresponding relationship with the running speed. The unit is Hz.
7) Input terminal low bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
- 177 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Meaning
Reserved
Up leveling signal
Down leveling signal
Door zone signal
Safety circuit feedback 1
Door lock circuit feedback 1
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback 1
Bit
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Meaning
Inspection signal
Inspection up signal
Inspection down signal
Fire emergency signal
Up limit signal
Down limit signal
Overload signal
Full-load signal
8) Input terminal high bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit
Bit8
Bit9
Meaning
Door machine 1 light curtain
Door machine 2 light curtain
Bit10 Brake output feedback 2
Bit11 UPS input
Bit12 Elevator lock input
Bit13 Safety circuit feedback 2
Bit14
Synchronous motor self-locked feedback
Bit15 Door lock circuit feedback 2
9) Output terminal: indicates the meaning of output terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Meaning
Up slow-down 1 signal
Down slow-down 1 signal
Up slow-down 2 signal
Down slow-down 2 signal
Up slow-down 3 signal
Down slow-down 3 signal
Shorting door lock circuit contactor output feedback
Motor overheat signal
Meaning
Reserved
RUN contactor output
Brake contactor output
Shorting door lock circuit contactor output
Fire emergency floor arrival signal
Door machine 1 open
Door machine 1 close
Door machine 2 open
Bit
Bit8
Meaning
Door machine 2 close
Bit9 Contactor healthy
Bit10 Fault state
Bit11 System in running state
Bit12 Reserved
Bit13 Reserved
Bit14 Reserved
Bit15 Emergency leveling buzzer output
- 178 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
10) Current floor: indicates the information of the physical floor where the elevator is located. It is the same as the value of F4-01.
11) Current position: indicates the absolute distance from the current elevator car to the leveling flag of the first floor, in unit of m.
12) Car load: indicates the percentage of the car load to the rated load judged by the
NICE3000 new
system based on data from the sensor, in unit of %.
13) CTB input state: indicates the meaning of CTB inputs by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Meaning
Light curtain 1
Light curtain 2
Door open limit 1
Door open limit 2
Door close limit 1
Door close limit 2
Full-load signal
Overload signal
Bit
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Meaning
Door open button
Door close button
Door open delay button
Direct travel ride signal
Attendant signal
Direction change signal
Independent running signal
Firefighter operation signal
14) CTB output state: indicates the meaning of CTB outputs by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Meaning
Door open output 1
Door close output 1
Door lock signal
Door open output 2
Door close output 2
Door lock signal
Up arrival gong signal
Down arrival gong signal
Bit
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Meaning
Door open button display
Door close button display
Door open delay button display
Non-door zone stop
Reserved
Buzzer output
Reserved
Energy saving signal
15) System state: indicates the system state by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
- 179 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Meaning
Light curtain state 1
Light curtain state 2
Hall elevator lock (indicated on HCB)
Hall fire emergency (indicated on HCB)
Elevator state:
0: Inspection
1: Shaft auto-tuning
3: Return to base floor at fire emergency
4: Firefighter operation
6: Attendant operation
7: Automatic (normal)
Bit
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Meaning
Car state:
1: Door open
2: Door open holding
3: Door close
4: Door close limit
5: Running
Bit12 Full-load
Bit13 Overload
Bit14 Reserved
Bit15 Reserved
16) Pre-torque current: indicates the percentage of the pre-torque current compensated by the NICE3000 new
system at startup to the rated current, in unit of %.
Function Code
FA-03
Parameter Name
Current encoder angle
Setting Range Default
0.0–359.9
0.0
Unit
Degree (°)
It displays the real-time encoder angle. This parameter cannot be modified.
Property
●
Function Code
FA-05
FA-06
Parameter Name
Control board software
Drive board software
Setting Range
0–65535
0–65535
Default
0
0
Unit
-
-
Property
●
●
These two parameters respectively display the program version number of the logic control board and the drive control board.
Function Code
FA-07
Parameter Name
Heatsink temperature
Setting Range Default
0–100 0
Unit
°C
Property
●
It displays the current temperature of the heatsink.
Normally, the heatsink temperature is below 40°C. When the heatsink temperature is too high, the system lowers the carrier frequency automatically to reduce heat dissipation. When the heatsink temperature rises to a certain value, the system reports the module overheat fault and stops running.
Function Code
FA-11
Parameter Name
Pre-torque current
Setting Range
0.0–200.0
Default
0
Unit
%
Property
●
It displays the percentage of pre-torque current to the rated current (positive/negative display, indicating driving or braking).
- 180 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
FA-12
Parameter Name
Logic information
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
0
Property
●
It displays the elevator status parameters.
The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. LED 1 shows the state of door 1.
LEDs 2 and 3 have no display. LEDs 4 and 5 together show the elevator state.
Figure 7-7 Elevator state display
5 4 3 2 1
Unit
-
The LEDs are defined in the following table.
Table 7-15 LED display of the elevator state
LED 5
LED 4
Elevator State
00 Inspection state 8 Elevator lock
01 Shaft auto-tuning
LED 3
No
Display
LED 2
No
Display
LED 1
Door 1 State
0 Waiting state
1 Door open state
02 Micro-leveling
03
Returning to base floor at fire emergency
05 Fault state
11
Emergency evacuation operation
12 Motor auto-tuning
13 Keypad control
14 Base floor check
07 Automatic running 15 VIP state
-
2 Door open limit
3 Door close state
4 Door close limit
-
-
-
Function Code
FA-13
Parameter Name
Curve information
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
●
It displays the system running curve information. LEDs 5, 4 and 3 have no display, while
LEDs 2 and 1 show the running curve information.
- 181 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3
No
Display
No
Display
No
Display
-
LED 2 LED 1
00 Standby state
01
Zero-speed start segment
02
Zero-speed holding segment
03 Reserved
Curve Information
09 Deceleration start segment
10
Linear deceleration segment
04 Startup speed stage
05
06
Acceleration start segment
Linear acceleration segment
07
08
Acceleration end segment
Stable-speed running segment
11
12
13
14
15
Zero speed at stop
Current stop phase
16-20 Auto-tuning stage
21
Deceleration end segment
Reserved
Stop data processing
Emergency operation
Function Code
FA-14
FA-15
FA-16
FA-17
FA-18
FA-19
FA-20
FA-21
FA-22
FA-23
Parameter Name
Set speed
Feedback speed
Bus voltage
Present position
Output current
Output frequency
Torque current
Output voltage
Output torque
Output power
Setting Range
0.000–4.000
0.000–4.000
0–999.9
0.00–300.0
0.0–999.9
0.00–99.99
0.0–999.9
0–999.9
0–100
0.00–99.99
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
A
Hz
A
V
% kW
Unit m/s m/s
V m
These parameters display the current performance state of the system (the output torque and output power supports positive/negative display).
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Function Code
FA-24
Parameter Name
Communication interference
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 -
●
It displays the current communication quality of the system, as described in the following table.
- 182 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Table 7-16 Communication quality display
LED 5
SPI
Communication
Quality
0 Good
↓ ↑
9 Interrupted
LED 4
No
Display
↓
9
LED 3
CAN2
Communication
Quality
0 Good
↑
Interrupted
↓
9
LED 2
Modbus
Communication
Quality
0 Good
↑
Interrupted
↓
9
LED 1
CAN1
Communication
Quality
0 Good
↑
Interrupted
0–9 indicates the communication quality. The greater the number is, the larger interference the communication suffers and the poorer the communication quality is.
Function Code
FA-26
FA-27
FA-28
FA-30
FA-31
FA-32
FA-33
FA-34
FA-35
FA-36
FA-37
Parameter Name Setting Range
Input state 1 0–65535
Input state 2
Input state 3
0–65535
0–65535
Input state 5
Output state 1
Output state 2
Car input state
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Car output state
Hall sate
System state 1
System state 2
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The following figure shows an example of the displayed input states.
Figure 7-8 Example of input state display
-
-
-
-
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
5 4
Function code
3
State
F
E
2
A
G
B F
C
DP
E
1
A
B
G
D
C
DP D
Each segment indicates a function code.
As shown in the preceding figure, the LEDs from right to left are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and
5. For FA-26 to FA-37, LEDs 5 and 4 show the function No.; LED 3 shows whether the function is valid (1) or invalid (0); the 16 segments of LEDs 1 and 2 show the states of the
16 functions in this parameter. According to the figure, LEDs 5, 4, and 3 show that function
10 (Inspection down) is 1 (Valid); LEDs 1 and 2 show that besides function 10, functions
4 (Safety circuit feedback), 5 (Door lock circuit feedback), 6 (RUN contactor feedback), 7
(Brake contactor feedback), and 8 (Inspection signal) are valid.
- 183 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
No.
0 Reserved
FA-26 Input state 1
Function No.
8
Function
Inspection signal
No.
64
FA-28 Input state 3
Function No.
Reserved 72
Function
Fire emergency floor switchover
1
2
Up leveling signal
Down leveling signal
9 Inspection up
10 Inspection down
65
66
Door 1 safety edge signal
Door 2 safety edge signal
73 Reserved
74 Reserved
3
4
5
6
7
No.
Door zone signal
Safety circuit feedback
Door lock circuit feedback
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
12 Up limit signal
13 Down limit signal
14 Overload signal
15 Full-load signal
FA-27 Input state 2
Function No.
Function
67
68
69
70
71
No.
Motor overheat signal
Earthquake signal
Back door forbidden
Light-load
Half-load
Function
75 Reserved
76 Reserved
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
FA-30 Input state 5
No.
Function
0 Reserved 8 Reserved
25
26
Door machine 2 light curtain
Brake contactor feedback 2
27 UPS input
1
2
Reserved
Reserved
9
10
Reserved
Reserved
22
Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
28
29
30
31
Elevator lock input
Safety circuit 2 signal
Shorting motor stator contactor feedback
Door lock circuit
2 feedback
3 Reserved
4
5
11 Reserved
Higher-voltage safety circuit signal
Higher-voltage door lock circuit signal
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
6
7
Reserved
Reserved
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
- 184 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
No.
0
1
2
3
FA-31 Output state 1
Function
Reserved
RUN contactor output
Brake contactor output
Shorting door lock circuit contactor output
Fire emergency floor arrival
No.
8
9
Function
Door 2 close
Brake and RUN contactors healthy
11 Running state
No.
16
17
18
19
FA-32 Output state 2
Function No.
Function
Higher-voltage startup of brake
Elevator running in up direction
Lamp/Fan output
24 Reserved
25 Reserved
26 Reserved
Medical sterilization
27 Reserved
4
5
6
Door 1 open
Door 1 close
12
13
Shorting motor stator contactor output
Power failure emergency output
14 System healthy
20
Non-door zone stop
21
22
Electric lock output
Non-service state
23 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
7 Door 2 open 31 Reserved
No.
0
FA-33 Car input state
Function
Reserved
No.
8
Function
Overload input
No.
0
FA-34 Car output state
Function No.
Reserved 8
Function
Down arrival gong
1 Door 1 light curtain 9
Light-load input
2 Door 2 light curtain 10 Reserved
1 Door 1 open 9 Reserved
3
4
5
6
7
Door 1 open limit
Door 2 open limit
Door 1 close limit
Door 2 close limit
Full-load input
11
12
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
2 Door 1 close
3
Forced door close 1
4 Door 2 open
10
11
Reserved
Reserved
12 Reserved
5 Door 2 close
6
Forced door close 2
13
14
7 Up arrival gong 15
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
- 185 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
3
4
5
6
7
Direct travel ride switch
Attendant switch
Direction change switch
Independent running switch
Fire emergency 2 switch
FA-35 Hall state
No.
0 Reserved 4 VIP signal
1 Elevator lock signal 5 Security signal
2
3 signal
Function
Fire emergency
Current floor forbidden
No.
6
7
Function
Door close button input
Reserved
No.
FA-36 System state 1
Function No.
Function
0
1
Door open 1 button
Door close 1 button
8
9
Door open 2 button
Door close 2 button
2 Door open delay 1 10 Door open 2
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
No.
Function
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10
11
No.
0
1
Reserved
Reserved
FA-37 System state 2
Function No.
Function
Up direction display
Down direction display
2 Running state
3
4
5
6
7
System fullload
System overload
System halfload
System lightload
Reserved
No.
8
9
Function
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
Function Code
FA-46
FA-47
FA-48
Parameter Name
Hall call communication state 1
Hall call communication state 2
Hall call communication state 3
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 0 -
●
0–65535
0–65535
0
0
-
-
●
●
These parameters display the communication state between HCBs of all floors and the
MCB.
FA-46, FA-47, and FA-48 respectively indicate the communication state of floors 1 to 16,
17 to 32, and 33 to 40. As shown in Figure 7-4, LEDs 5 and 4 show the floor address; LED
3 show whether the communication for this floor address is normal ("1" is displayed) or interrupted ("0" is displayed). The communication quality can be viewed from LEDs 1 and
2: The 16 segments show the communication state of 16 floor addresses; ON indicates that the communication is normal, and OFF indicates that the communication is interrupted.
- 186 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Group Fb: Door Function Parameter
Function Code
Fb-00
Parameter Name
Number of door machine (s)
It is used to set the number of door machine(s).
Set this parameter based on actual conditions.
Setting Range Default Unit Property
1–2 1 -
★
Function Code
Fb-01
Parameter Name
CTB software
Setting Range
00–999
It displays the software of the CTB connected to the controller.
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
●
Function Code
Fb-02
Fb-03
Fb-18
Fb-04
Fb-05
Fb-19
Parameter Name
Service floors 1 of door machine 1
Service floors 2 of door machine 1
Service floors 3 of door machine 1
Service floors 1 of door machine 2
Service floors 2 of door machine 2
Service floors 3 of door machine 2
Setting Range
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
0–65535
Default
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
These parameters are used to set the service floors of door machine 1 and door machine 2.
Service floors 1 correspond to floors 1–16; service floors 2 correspond to floors 17–32; service floors 3 correspond to floors 33–48. The setting method is the same as that for F6-
05.
Function Code
Fb-06
Parameter Name
Door open protection time
Setting Range
5–99
Default Unit Property
10 s
☆
It is used to set the door open protection time.
After outputting the door open command, if the system does not receive the door open limit signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-opens the door. When the door open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err48.
Function Code
Fb-07
Parameter Name
Arrival gong output delay
Setting Range Default
0–1000 0
Unit ms
Property
☆
When the value of this parameter is larger than 10 and the car display is switched over to the destination floor, the system outputs the arrival gong after the time set in this parameter.
If the value is smaller than 10, the system outputs the arrival gong at stop.
- 187 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
Fb-08
Parameter Name
Door close protection time
Setting Range
5–99
Default Unit Property
15 s
☆
It is used to set the door close protection time.
After outputting the door close command, if the system does not receive the door close limit signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-closes the door. When the door open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err49.
Function Code
Fb-09
Parameter Name
Door re-open times
Setting Range Default
0–20 0
Unit
-
Property
It is used to set the door re-open/re-close times allowed when door open/close is abnormal.
Note
☆
If this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that door re-open is not supported; in this case, the elevator keeps opening/closing the door if it does not receive the door open/close limit signal.
Function Code
Fb-10
Parameter Name
Door state of standby elevator
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–2 0 -
☆
It is used to set the door state when the elevator is in stop and standby state.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Closing the door as normal at base floor
• 1: Waiting with door open at base floor
• 2: Waiting with door open at each floor
Function Code
Fb-11
Parameter Name
Door open holding time for hall call
Setting Range Default
1–1000 5
Unit s
Property
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a hall call. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code
Fb-12
Parameter Name
Door open holding time for car call
Setting Range
1–1000
Default
3
Unit s
Property
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a car call. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code
Fb-13
Parameter Name
Door open holding time at base floor
Setting Range
1–1000
Default
10
Unit s
Property
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time after the elevator arrives at the base floor. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
- 188 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
Fb-14
Parameter Name
Door open delay
Setting Range
10–1000
Default
30
Unit s
Property
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is door open delay input. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code
Fb-15
Parameter Name
Special door open holding time
Setting Range Default Unit Property
10–1000 30 s
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a disability call.
Function Code
Fb-16
Parameter Name
Manual door open holding time
Setting Range Default Unit Property
1–60 5 s
☆
It is used to set the door open limit delay in the case of manual door. This parameter is valid when the manual door function is used.
Function Code
Fb-17
Parameter Name
Holding time for forced door close
Setting Range
5–180
Default
120
Unit s
Property
☆
It is used to set the holding time before forced door close is implemented.
If the forced door close function is enabled, the system enters the forced door close state and sends a forced door close signal when there is no door close signal after the time set in this parameter is reached.
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters
Function Code
FC-00
Parameter Name
Program control for protection function
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Function
Short-circuit to ground detection at power-on
Reserved
Decelerating to stop at valid light curtain
FC-00 Program control for protection function
Description
Whether the motor is short-circuited to ground is detected at power-on. If the motor is short-circuited to ground, the controller blocks the output immediately, and reports the fault.
-
During normal-speed running, the elevator decelerates to stop immediately after the light curtain acts, and then runs to the registered destination floor after the light curtain restores. This function is mainly used in the case of manual door.
Default
0
0
0
- 189 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit
Bit9
Function
Mode without door open/close limit
FC-00 Program control for protection function
Description
In this mode, the door open/close limit signal is not required, and the system automatically judges door open/close limit. The system determines that door open limit is implemented 3s after the door open command is output and door close limit is implemented
3s after the door close command is output.
Default
0
Function Code
FC-01
Parameter Name
Program control 2 for protection function
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
65
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Bit Function
FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function
Description
Bit0 Overload protection It sets whether to implement overload protection.
It sets whether to implement protection at output phase loss.
Bit4
Bit5
Light curtain judgment at door close limit
Canceling SPI communication judgment
Bit6 Reserved
Bit8 Reserved
At door close limit, the door re-opens if the light curtain is valid.
It sets whether to implement wire-breaking detection on SPI communication between the MCB and the drive board.
-
-
It sets whether to implement protection at input phase loss.
Default
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Function Code
FC-02
Parameter Name
Overload protection coefficient
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0.50–10.00
1.00
-
★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-02 x Rated motor current) and the duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs fault Err11 indicating motor overload.
Function Code
FC-03
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Overload pre-warning coefficient 50%–100% 80% -
★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-03 x Rated motor current) and the duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs a prewarning signal.
- 190 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code
FC-04
Parameter Name
Opposite door selection
Setting Range Default
0–3 0
It is used to set opposite door-related control function.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Simultaneous control
• 1: Hall call independent, car call simultaneous
• 2: Hall call independent, car call manual control
• 3: Hall call independent, car call independent
For details on the use of the opposite door, see section 5.2.3.
Unit
-
Property
★
Function Code
FC-06
Parameter Name
Designated fault
Setting Range Default
0–99 0
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is used to designate the fault to be monitored.
The designated fault code is saved in parameters of FC-07 to FC-19, and will not be overwritten.
Function Code
FC-07
FC-08
FC-09
FC-10
FC-11
FC-12
FC-13
FC-14
FC-15
FC-16
FC-17
FC-18
FC-19
Parameter Name
Designated fault code
Designated fault subcode
Designated fault month and day
Designated fault hour and minute
Logic information of designated fault
Curve information of designated fault
Set speed upon designated fault
Feedback speed upon designated fault
Bus voltage upon designated fault
Current position upon designated fault
Output current upon designated fault
Output frequency upon designated fault
Torque current upon designated fault
Setting Range
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
0–65535
0–65535
0.000–4.000
0.000–4.000
0.0–999.9
0.0–300.0
0.0–999.9
0.00–99.99
0.0–999.9
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
m/s m/s
V m
A
Hz
A
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
- 191 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code
FC-20
FC-21
FC-22
FC-23
FC-24
FC-25
FC-26
FC-27
FC-56
FC-57
FC-58
FC-59
Parameter Name
1st fault code 0–9999
1st fault subcode
1st fault month and day
1st fault hour and minute
2nd fault code
2nd fault subcode
2nd fault month and day
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
2nd fault hour and minute 0–23.59
···
10th fault code
10th fault subcode
0–9999
0–65535
10th fault month and day 0–1231
10th fault hour and minute 0–23.59
Setting Range Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
These parameters record the latest 10 faults of the elevator.
The fault code is a 4-digit number. The two high digits indicate the floor where the car is located when the fault occurs, and the two low digits indicate the fault code. For example, the 1st fault code is 0835, indicating that when the 1st fault (fault Err35) occurs, the car is near floor 8.
The fault subcode is used to locate the causes of the fault. The specific fault time is recorded in month, day, hour and minute.
Function Code
FC-60
FC-61
FC-62
FC-63
FC-64
FC-65
FC-66
FC-67
FC-68
FC-69
FC-70
FC-71
FC-72
Parameter Name
Latest fault code
Latest fault subcode
Latest fault month and day
Latest fault hour and minute
Logic information of latest fault
Curve information of latest fault
Set speed upon latest fault
Setting Range Default
0–9999
0–65535
0–1231
0–23.59
0–65535
0–65535
0.000–4.000
Feedback speed upon latest fault
Bus voltage upon latest fault
0.000–4.000
0.0–999.9
Current position upon latest fault 0.0–300.0
0–999.9
Output current upon latest fault
Output frequency upon latest fault
Torque current upon latest fault
0.00–99.99
0.0–999.9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
-
-
MM.DD
HH.MM
-
m/s
A m/s
V m
A
Hz
Property
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
- 192 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Group Fd: Communication Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name
Fd-00
Fd-02
Baud rate
Local address
Setting Range
0: 9600
1: 38400
0–127
0: Broadcast address
Default
0
1
Unit bit/s
-
Property
★
★
Fd-03
Fd-04
Communication response delay
Communication timeout
0–20
0.0–60.0
0: Invalid
10
0.0
ms s
★
★
These RS232 serial port communication parameters are used for communication with the monitor software in the host computer.
• Fd-00 specifies the baud rate for serial communication. Fd-02 specifies the current address of the controller. The setting of these two parameters must be consistent with the setting of the serial port parameters on the host computer.
• Fd-03 specifies the delay for the controller to send data by means of the serial port.
• Fd-04 specifies the communication timeout time of the serial port. Transmission of each frame must be completed within the time set in Fd-04; otherwise, a communication fault occurs.
Function Code
Fd-05
Parameter Name
Re-leveling stop delay
Setting Range Default
0.00–2.00
0.00
Unit s
Property
★
It is used to set the stop delay at re-leveling. After receiving the leveling signal during releveling, the elevator stops after the delay set in this parameter.
Function Code Parameter Name
Fd-07
Fd-08
HCB:JP1 input
HCB:JP2 input
Setting Range
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Elevator lock signal
2/34: Fire emergency signal
3/35: Current floor forbidden
4/36: VIP floor signal
5/37: Security floor signal
6/38: Door close button signal
7/39: Second fire emergency floor signal
Default Unit Property
1
2 -
-
★
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB.
The setting is effective to the HCBs for all floors.
- 193 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Function Code Parameter Name
Fd-09
Fd-10
HCB:JP1 output
HCB:JP2 output
Setting Range
0: Invalid
1: Up arrival indicator
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop output
5: Non-service state output
6: Door close button indicator output
Default Unit Property
1
2 -
-
★
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 1 and 4 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The setting is effective to the HCBs for all floors.
Note
The output load capacity of the HCB is limited, with the output voltage of 24 V and the load power not larger than 1 W.
Function Code Parameter Name
Fd-11 HCB-B:JP1 input
Fd-12
Fd-13
Fd-14
Fd-15
Fd-16
HCB-B:JP2 input
HCB-B:JP3 input
HCB-B:JP4 input
HCB-B:JP5 input
HCB-B:JP6 input
Setting Range
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Light-load signal
2/34: Half-load signal
3/35: Door 2 selection
4/36: Door 2 restricted
(back door forbidden)
5/37: Door 1 safety edge
6/38: Door 2 safety edge
7/39: Single/Double door selection
Default Unit Property
0 -
★
0
0
0
0
0 -
-
-
-
-
★
★
★
★
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 to JP6 on the HCB-B no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to all HCB-Bs connected to the system.
Setting Range Function Code Parameter Name
Fd-17 HCB-B:A1 output
Fd-18
Fd-19
HCB-B:A2 output
HCB-B:B1 output
Fd-20
Fd-21
Fd-22
Fd-23
HCB-B:B2 output
HCB-B:C1 output
HCB-B:C2 output
HCB-B:C3 output
Fd-24
Fd-25
Fd-26
HCB-B:C4 output
HCB-B:C5 output
HCB-B:C6 output
0: Reserved
1: Fault output
2: Non-door zone stop output
3: Non-service state output
4: Fire emergency output
5: Power failure emergency output
6: Door lock valid
7: Night output signal
0
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Unit Property
-
★
-
-
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
- 194 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
These parameters are used to set the functions of four relay outputs and six open-collector outputs on the HCB-B no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to all HCB-Bs connected to the system.
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters
Function Code
FE-00
Parameter Name
Collective selective mode
Setting Range
0–2
Default
0
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
0100
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0400
Unit Property
-
★
It is used to set the collective selective mode of the system.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Full collective selective
The elevator responds to both up and down hall calls.
• 1: Down collective selective
The elevator responds to down hall calls but does not respond to up hall calls.
• 2: Up collective selective
The elevator responds to hall up calls but does not respond to hall down calls.
Function
Code
Parameter
Name
Setting Range
FE-01 Floor 1 display 00: Display "0"
FE-02 Floor 2 display
01: Display "1"
FE-03 Floor 3 display
FE-04 Floor 4 display
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
FE-05
FE-06
FE-07 Floor 7 display
FE-08
Floor 5 display
Floor 6 display
Floor 8 display
04: Display "4"
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
FE-09
FE-10
Floor 9 display
Floor 10 display
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
Floor 11 to floor 30 display
FE-31 Floor 31 display
10: Display "A"
11: Display "B"
FE-35 Floor 32 display
12: Display "G"
13: Display "H"
FE-36 Floor 33 display
FE-37 Floor 34 display
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
FE-38 Floor 35 display
FE-39 Floor 36 display
16: Display "P"
17: Display "R"
FE-40 Floor 37 display
FE-41 Floor 38 display
18: Display "-"
19: No display
FE-42
FE-43
Floor 39 display
Floor 40 display
20: Display "12"
21: Display "13"
22: Display "23"
23: Display "C"
24: Display "D"
25: Display "E"
26: Display "F"
27: Display "I"
28: Display "J"
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
31: Display "O"
32: Display "Q"
33: Display "S"
34: Display "T"
35: Display "U"
36: Display "V"
37: Display "W"
38: Display "X"
39: Display "Y"
40: Display "Z"
41: Display "15"
42: Display "17"
43: Display "19"
Default Unit Property
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
···
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
- 195 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
These parameters are used to set the display of each floor. The setting range is 0000–9999, where the two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits indicate the display code of the unit's digit.
Function Code
FE-52
FE-53
FE-54
FE-55
FE-56
Parameter Name
Highest digit selection 1
Highest digit selection 2
Highest digit selection 3
Highest digit selection 4
Highest digit selection 5
Setting Range Default
0
0
0–4099 0
0
0
-
-
-
Unit
-
-
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
These parameters are used to set special floor display.
When the 2-digit display cannot meet the requirement, you can add the third-digit display by setting these parameters. In the values of these parameters, the two high digits indicate the floor address that requires special display, and the two low digits indicate the display content.
For example, if floor 18 needs to be displayed as "17A", set FE-18 to 0710 (display "7A"), and then set the highest digit display, that is, FE-52 to 1801 (indicating that the highest digit display of floor address 18 is "1").
Function Code
FE-32
Parameter Name
Elevator function selection 1
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 34816 -
☆
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Bit Function
Bit0 Reserved
Bit1 Reserved
FE-32 Elevator function selection 1
Description
-
-
The elevator performs re-leveling at a low speed with door open. An external shorting door lock circuit contactor needs to be used together.
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller than a certain value and the door zone signal is active, the system shorts the door lock by means of the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door open signal, implementing door pre-open. This improves the elevator use efficiency.
The system automatically identifies the state of the hall call buttons. If the state is abnormal, the system cancels the stuck hall call.
From 10:00 p.m to 6:00 a.m., the elevator runs to the security floor first every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination floor.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
- 196 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Bit
Bit6
Bit7
Bit8
Function
Down collective selective peak service
Parallel/Group control peak service
Time-based service floor function
Bit9 VIP function
Bit10 Reserved
Bit11 Car call deletion
Bit12 Hall call deletion
Bit13 to
Bit15
Reserved
FE-32 Elevator function selection 1
Description
The peak service at down collective selective is used.
The peak service is used.
For details, see the description of related parameters in group F6.
The VIP function is used.
-
A call can be deleted by pressing the button twice consecutively.
-
Default
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Function Code
FE-33
Parameter Name
Elevator function selection 2
Setting Range Default Unit Property
0–65535 36 -
☆
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Bit
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Function
Reserved
Door open holding at open limit
Door close command not output upon door close limit
Reserved
FE-33 Elevator Function Selection 2
Description
-
The system still outputs the door open command upon door open limit.
The system stops outputting the door close command upon door close limit.
Auto reset for
RUN and brake contactor stuck
Slow-down switch stuck detection
Reserved
-
If the feedback of the RUN and brake contactors is abnormal, faults Err36 and Err37 are reported, and you need to manually reset the system.
With this function, the system resets automatically after the fault symptom disappears. A maximum of three auto reset times are supported.
The system detects the state of slow-down switches.
Once detecting that a slow-down switch is stuck, the system instructs the elevator to slow down immediately and reports a corresponding fault.
-
Default
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
- 197 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
Bit Function
Bit7 Forced door close
FE-33 Elevator Function Selection 2
Description
If the door still does not close within the time set in
Fb-17 in automatic state, the system outputs the forced door close signal; at this moment, the light curtain becomes invalid and the buzzer tweets.
Bit8
NO/NC output selection of shorting motor stator contactor
Bit8 = 0: NC output contactor
Bit8 = 1: NO output contactor
Bit9
Immediate stop upon re-leveling
The elevator decelerates to stop immediately after receiving a single leveling signal during re-leveling.
By default, when receiving a leveling signal, the elevator stops after the re-leveling stop delay set in
Fd-05.
Bit10 to
Bit12
Reserved
Bit13
High-speed elevator protection function
Bit14 Reserved
Bit15
Opposite door independent control
A maximum allowable speed is set when the car is in the slow-down switch position. When the elevator exceeds the speed at the position, the system outputs a protection signal.
-
-
For details, see section 5.2.3.
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters
Function Code
Fr-00
Parameter Name
Leveling adjustment function
Setting Range
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default
0
This parameter is used to enable the leveling adjustment function.
Unit
-
Default
★
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Property
Function Code
Fr-01
Fr-02
Fr-20
Parameter Name
Leveling adjustment record 1
Leveling adjustment record 2
…
Leveling adjustment record 20
Setting Range Default Unit Property
00000–60060
30030
30030
30030 mm mm
… mm
★
★
★
These parameters are used to record the leveling adjustment values. Each parameter records the adjustment information of two floors, and therefore, the adjustment information of 40 floors can be recorded totally.
The method of viewing the record is shown in the following figure.
- 198 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Figure 7-9 Viewing the leveling adjustment record
5 4 3
Function code State
2
A
1
A
F B F B
E
G
D
C
DP
E
G
D
C
DP
Each segment indicates a function code.
As shown in the preceding figure, the left two LEDs and the right two LEDs respectively show the adjustment bases of floor 1 and floor 2. If the value is larger than 30, it is upward leveling adjustment; if the value is smaller than 30, it is downward leveling adjustment. The default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling adjustment. The maximum adjustment range is ±30 mm.
The leveling adjustment method is as follows:
1. Ensure that shaft auto-tuning is completed successfully, and the elevator runs properly at normal speed.
2. Set Fr-00 to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment function. Then, the elevator shields hall calls, automatically runs to the top floor, and keeps the door open after arrival. If the elevator is at the top floor, it directly keeps the door open.
3. Go into the car, press the top floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm upward; press the bottom floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm downward. The value is displayed in the car.
Positive value: up arrow + value, negative value: down arrow + value, adjustment range:
±30 mm
4. After completing adjustment for the current floor, press the top floor button and bottom floor button in the car at the same time to save the adjustment result. The car display restores to the normal state. If the leveling position of the current floor need not be adjusted, press the top floor button and bottom floor button in the car at the same time to exit the leveling adjustment state. Then, car calls can be registered.
5. Press the door close button, and press the button for the next floor. The elevator runs to the next floor and keeps the door open after arrival. Then, you can perform leveling adjustment.
6. After completing adjustment for all floors, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling adjustment function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used.
Pay attention to the following precautions during the operation:
1. Each time shaft auto-tuning is performed, all leveling adjustment parameters can be cleared or reserved.
a. If you set F1-11 to 3 on the operation panel or F7 to 1 on the keypad, all leveling adjustment parameters are reserved.
b. If you set F1-11 to 4 on the operation panel or F-7 to 2 on the keypad, all leveling adjustment parameters are reserved.
- 199 -
Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual
2. When the re-leveling function is used, the leveling adjustment function is automatically shielded and cannot be used.
Group FF: Factory Parameters
Group FP: User Parameters
Function Code
FP-00
Parameter Name
User password
Setting Range
0–65535
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
☆
It is used to set the user password.
If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect, you cannot view or modify parameters.
If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password protection function is disabled.
Remember the password that you set. If the password is set incorrectly or forgotten, contact
Monarch to replace the control board.
Function Code
FP-01
Parameter Name
Parameter update
Setting Range
0–2
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set processing on the parameters.
The values are as follows:
• 0: No operation
• 1: Restore default settings
• 2: Clear fault records
If you set this parameter to 1 (Restore default settings), all parameters except group F1 are restored to the default settings. Be cautions with this setting.
Function Code
FP-02
Parameter Name
User-defined parameter display
Setting Range
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Default
0
Unit
-
Property
★
It is used to set whether to display the parameters that are modified.
When it is set to 1, the parameters that are different from the default setting are displayed.
- 200 -
8
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Maintenance
8.1.1 Routine Maintenance
The influence of the ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will cause the aging of the components inside the controller, which may cause potential faults or reduce the service life of the controller. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out routine and periodic maintenance.
Routine maintenance involves checking:
• Whether abnormal noise exists during motor running
• Whether the motor vibrates excessively
• Whether the installation environment of the controller changes
• Whether the cooling fan works properly
• Whether the controller overheats
Routine cleaning involves:
• Keep the controller clean all the time.
• Remove the dust, especially metal powder on the surface of the controller, to prevent the dust from entering the controller.
• Clear the oil stain on the cooling fan of the controller.
8.1.2 Periodic Inspection
Perform periodic inspection on the items that are difficult to check during running. Periodic inspection involves:
• Check and clean the air filter periodically.
• Check whether the screws become loose.
• Check whether the controller is corroded.
• Check whether the wiring terminals have arc signs.
• Carry out the main circuit insulation test.
Note
Before measuring the insulating resistance with megameter (500 VDC megameter recommended), disconnect the main circuit from the controller. Do not use the insulating resistance meter to test the insulation of the control circuit. The high voltage test need not be performed again because it has been completed before delivery.
- 202 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
8.1.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Components
Vulnerable components of the controller include the cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor. Their service life is related to the operating environment and maintenance.
The service life of the two components is listed in the following table.
Table 8-1 Service life of cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor
Component Service Life Possible Damage Cause
Fan 2 to 3 years
• Bearing worn
• Blade aging
Electrolytic capacitor
4 to 5 years
• Input power supply in poor quality
• High ambient temperature
• Frequent load jumping
• Electrolytic aging
The service life is obtained based on the following conditions:
• Ambient temperature: average 30°C per year
• Load rate: below 80%
• Running time: less than 20 hours per day
Judging Criteria
• Check whether there is crack on the blade.
• Check whether there is abnormal vibration noise upon startup.
• Check whether there is liquid leakage.
• Check whether the safety valve has projected.
• Measure the static capacitance.
• Measure the insulating resistance.
8.1.4 Storage of the Controller
For storage of the controller, pay attention to the following two aspects:
1. Pack the controller with the original packing box provided by Monarch.
2. Long-term storage degrades the electrolytic capacitor. Thus, the controller must be energized once every 2 years, each time lasting at least 5 hours. The input voltage must be increased slowly to the rated value with the regulator.
8.2 Description of Fault Levels
The NICE3000 new has almost 60 pieces of alarm information and protective functions. It monitors various input signals, running conditions and feedback signals. If a fault occurs, the system implements the relevant protective function and displays the fault code.
The controller is a complicated electronic control system and the displayed fault information is graded into five levels according to the severity. The faults of different levels are handled according to the following table.
- 203 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Table 8-2 Fault levels
Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Action
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action command.
1. Display fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action command.
3. Continue normal running of the elevator.
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action command.
3. Stop output and apply the brake immediately after stop.
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action command.
3. In distance control, the elevator decelerates to stop and cannot run again.
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action command.
3. The elevator stops immediately.
1A. The elevator running is not affected on any condition.
Remarks
2A. The paralle/group control l function is disabled.
2B. The door pre-open/re-leveling function is disabled.
3A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops at special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
3B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s.
4A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops under special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
4B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s.
4C. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s.
5A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops immediately and cannot restart.
5B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s.
Note
• A, B, and C are fault sub-category.
• Low-speed running involves inspection, emergency evacuation, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling, motor auto-tuning, base floor detection, and running in operation panel control.
• Normal-speed running involves automatic running, returning to base floor in fire emergency state, firefighter operation, attendant operation, elevator lock, and elevator parking.
- 204 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
8.3 Fault Information and Troubleshooting
If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault level. You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following table.
Table 8-3 Fault codes and troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes
Err02
Over-current during acceleration
Err03
Over-current during deceleration
• The main circuit output is grounded or short circuited.
• Motor auto-tuning is performed improperly.
• The load is too heavy.
• The encoder signal is incorrect.
• The UPS running feedback signal is incorrect.
• The main circuit output is grounded or short circuited.
• Motor auto-tuning is performed improperly.
• The load is too heavy.
• The deceleration rate is too short.
• The encoder signal is incorrect.
Solution
• Check whether the RUN contactor at the controller output side is normal.
• Check:
־ Whether the power cable jacket is damaged
־ Whether the power cable is possibly short circuited to ground
־ Whether the power cable is connected reliably
• Check the insulation of motor power terminals, and check whether the motor winding is short-circuited or grounded.
• Check whether shorting PMSM stator causes controller output short circuit.
• Check whether motor parameters comply with the nameplate.
• Perform motor auto-tuning again.
• Check whether the brake keeps released before the fault occurs and whether the brake is stuck mechanically.
• Check whether the balance coefficient is correct.
• Check whether the encoder wirings are correct. For asynchronous motor, perform
SVC and compare the current to judge whether the encoder works properly.
Level
5A
5A
(To be continued)
- 205 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes Solution
• The main circuit output is grounded or short circuited.
• Motor auto-tuning is performed properly.
• The load is too heavy.
• The encoder is seriously interfered with.
• Check:
־ Whether encoder pulses per revolution (PPR) is set correctly
־ Whether the encoder signal is interfered with
־ Whether the encoder cable runs through the duct independently
־ Whether the cable is too long
־ Whether the shield is grounded at one end
• Check:
־ Whether the encoder is installed reliably
־ Whether the rotating shaft is connected to the motor shaft reliably
־ Whether the encoder is stable during normal-speed running
• Check whether UPS feedback is valid in the non-UPS running state (Err02).
• Check whether the acceleration/deceleration rate is too high (Err02, Err03).
(End)
Level
5A
- 206 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes Solution
Err05
Err06
Over-voltage during acceleration
Over-voltage during deceleration
Err08
Maintenance notification period reached
Err09 Under-voltage
• The input voltage is too high.
• The regeneration power of the motor is too high.
• The braking resistance is too large, or the braking unit fails.
• The acceleration rate is too short.
• The input voltage is too high.
• The braking resistance is too large, or the braking unit fails.
• The deceleration rate is too short.
• The input voltage is too high.
• The braking resistance is too large, or the braking unit fails.
• Adjust the input voltage.
Observe whether the bus voltage is normal and whether it rises too quickly during running.
• Check for the balance coefficient.
• Select a proper braking resistor and check whether the resistance is too large based on the recommended braking resistance table in chapter 3.
• Check:
־ Whether the cable connecting the braking resistor is damaged
־ Whether the cooper wire touches the ground
־ Whether the connection is reliable
The elevator is not maintained within the notification period.
• Instantaneous power failure occurs on the input power supply.
• The input voltage is too low.
• The drive control board fails.
• Power-off and maintain the elevator.
• Disable the maintenance notification function by setting
F9-13 to 0.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
• Eliminate external power supply faults and check whether the power fails during running.
• Check whether the wiring of all power input cables is secure.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
Level
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
- 207 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name
Err11 Motor overload
Possible Causes Solution
• The brake circuit is abnormal.
• The load is too heavy.
• The encoder feedback signal is abnormal.
• The motor parameters are incorrect.
• A fault occurs on the motor power cables.
• FC-02 is set improperly.
• The brake circuit is abnormal.
• The load is too heavy.
• The power input phases are not symmetric.
• The drive control board fails.
• The output wiring of the main circuit is loose.
• The motor is damaged.
• The ambient temperature is too high.
• The fan is damaged.
• The air filter is blocked.
• Braking short-circuit occurs on the output side.
• The U, V, W output is abnormal.
• Check the brake circuit and power input.
• Reduce the load.
• Check whether the encoder feedback signal and setting are correct, and whether the initial angle of the encoder for the
PMSM is correct.
• Check the motor parameter setting and perform motor auto-tuning.
• Check the power cables of the motor (refer to the solution of
Err02).
• Adjust the parameter (FC-
02 can be set to the default value).
• Refer to the solution of Err10.
• Check whether the three phases of power supply are balanced and whether the power voltage is normal. If not, adjust the power input.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
• Check the wiring.
• Check whether the contactor on the output side is normal.
• Eliminate the motor fault.
• Lower the ambient temperature.
• Clear the air filter.
• Replace the damaged fan.
• Check whether the installation clearance of the controller satisfies the requirement.
• Check wiring of the braking resistor and braking unit is correct, without short-circuit.
• Check whether the main contactor works properly.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
Level
4A
3A
4A
4A
5A
5A
- 208 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Name
Err17
Reference signal of the encoder incorrect
Possible Causes Solution
The excitation current deviation is too large.
The torque current deviation is too large.
The torque limit is exceeded for a very long time.
The deviation between the
Z signal position and the absolute position is too large.
The deviation between the absolute position angle and the accumulative angle is too large.
• Check the circuit of the encoder.
• The output MCCB becomes
OFF.
• The values of the current loop parameters are too small.
• Perform motor auto-tuning again if the zero-point position is incorrect.
• Reduce the load if it too heavy.
• Check whether the encoder runs properly.
• Check whether the encoder wiring is correct and reliable.
• Check whether the PG card wiring is correct.
• Check whether the grounding of the control cabinet and the motor is normal.
The drive control board fails.
Contact the agent or Monarch.
The motor cannot rotate properly.
The motor auto-tuning times out.
The encoder for the PMSM fails.
• Enter the motor parameters correctly.
• Check the motor wiring and whether phase loss occurs on the contactor at the output side.
• Check the encoder wiring and ensure that the encoder PPR is set properly.
• Check whether the brake keeps released during no-load auto-tuning.
• Check whether the inspection button is released before the
PMSM with-load auto-tuning is finished.
Level
5A
5A
5A
5A
- 209 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name
Err20
Speed feedback incorrect
Possible Causes Solution
1: AB signals are lost during auto-tuning.
3: The phase sequence of the motor is incorrect.
4: Z signal cannot be detected during auto-tuning.
5: The CD signal cables of the SIN/COS encoder break.
7: The UVW cables of the
UVW encoder break.
8: The deviation between the absolute position angle and the cumulative angle is too large.
9: Overspeed occurs or the speed deviation is too large.
10/11: AB signals or CD signals of the SIN/COS encoder are interfered with.
12: The detected speed is 0 at torque limit.
13: AB signals are lost during running.
14: Z signal is lost during running.
19: The AB analog signal cables break during lowspeed running.
55: CD signal error or serious Z signal interference occurs during auto-tuning.
3: Exchange any two phases of the motor UVW cables.
1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 14, 19:
Check that all signal cable wiring of the encoder is correct and secure.
9: Check that the setting of F1-
00, F1-12, and F1-25 for the synchronous motor is correct.
12: Check that there is no mechanical stuck and that the brake has been released during running.
55: Check that the grounding is reliable and eliminate interference problems.
101: The leveling signal is active during floor switchover.
102: The falling edge of the leveling signal is not detected during elevator startup and floor switchover.
103: The leveling position deviation is too large in elevator auto-running state.
101, 102:
• Check whether the leveling and door zone sensors work properly.
• Check the installation verticality and depth of the leveling plates.
• Check the leveling signal input points of the MCB.
103: Check whether the steel rope slips.
Level
5A
1A
- 210 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes Solution
Err24 RTC clock fault
Err29
Err30
Shorting
PMSM stator feedback abnormal
Elevator position abnormal
101: The RTC clock information of the MCB is abnormal.
101:
• Replace the clock battery.
• Replace the MCB.
101, 102:
The storage data of the
MCB is abnormal.
101, 102: Contact the agent or
Monarch.
101: The earthquake signal is active and the duration exceeds 2s.
101: The shorting PMSM stator feedback is abnormal.
101, 102:
In the normal-speed running or re-leveling running mode, the running time is smaller than the smaller of
F9-02 and (FA-38 + 10), but the leveling signal has no change.
101: Check that the earthquake signal is consistent with the parameter setting (NC, NO) of the
MCB.
101:
• Check that the state (NO, NC) of the feedback contact on the contactor is correct.
• Check that the contactor and corresponding feedback contact act correctly.
• Check the coil circuit of the shorting PMSM stator contactor.
101, 102:
• Check whether the leveling signal cables are connected reliably and whether the signal copper wires may touch the ground or be short circuited with other signal cables.
• Check whether the distance between two floors is too large, causing too long re-leveling running time.
• Check whether signal loss exists in the encoder circuits.
Level
3B
4A
3B
5A
4A
- 211 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name
Err34 Logic fault
Possible Causes Solution
101: The detected running speed during normal-speed running exceeds the limit.
102: The speed exceeds the limit during inspection or shaft auto-tuning.
103: The speed exceeds the limit in shorting stator braking mode.
104: The speed exceeds the limit during emergency running.
105: The emergency running time protection function is enabled (set in Bit8 of F6-45), and the running time exceeds 50s, causing the timeout fault.
101:
• Check whether the encoder is used properly.
• Check the setting of motor nameplate parameters.
Perform motor auto-tuning again.
102: Attempt to decrease the inspection speed or perform motor auto-tuning again.
103: Check whether the shorting
PMSM stator function is enabled.
104, 105:
• Check whether the emergency power capacity meets the requirements.
• Check whether the emergency running speed is set properly.
Logic of the MCB is abnormal.
Contact the agent or Monarch.
Level
5A
5A
- 212 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Name
Err35
Shaft autotuning data abnormal
Possible Causes Solution
101: When shaft autotuning is started, the elevator is not at the bottom floor or the down slow-down is invalid,
102: The system is not in the inspection state when shaft auto-tuning is performed.
103: It is judged upon power-on that shaft autotuning is not performed.
104: In distance control mode, it is judged at running startup that shaft autotuning is not performed.
105: The elevator running direction and the pulse change are inconsistent.
106, 107, 109, 114: The plate pulse length sensed at up/down leveling is abnormal.
108, 110: No leveling signal is received within 45s continuous running.
111, 115: The stored floor height is smaller than 50 cm.
112: The floor when autotuning is completed is not the top floor.
113: The pulse check is abnormal.
101: Check that the next slowdown switch is valid, and that F4-
01 (Current floor) is set to 1.
102: Check that the inspection switch is in inspection state.
103, 104:
Perform shat auto-tuning.
105: Check whether the elevator running direction is consistent with the pulse change in F4-03:
F4-03 increases in up direction and decreases in down direction.
If not, change the value of F2-10 to ensure consistency.
106, 107, 109, 114:
• Check that NO/NC setting of the leveling sensor is set correctly
• Check whether the leveling plates are inserted properly and whether there is strong power interference if the leveling sensor signal blinks.
• Check whether the leveling plate is too long for the asynchronous motor.
108, 110:
Check whether the running times out: No leveling signal is received when the running time exceeds
F9-02.
111, 115:
Enable the super short floor function if the floor distance is less than 50 cm. If the floor distance is normal, check installation of the leveling plate for this floor and check the sensor.
112: Check whether the setting of
F6-00 (Top floor of the elevator) is smaller than the actual condition.
113: Check whether the signal of the leveling sensor is normal.
Perform shaft auto-tuning again.
Level
4C
- 213 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes Solution
Err36
Err37
RUN contactor feedback abnormal
Brake contactor feedback abnormal
Err39 Motor overheat
101: The feedback of the
RUN contactor is active, but the contactor has no output.
102: The controller outputs the RUN signal but receives no RUN feedback.
103: The startup current of the asynchronous motor is too small.
104: When both feedback signals of the RUN contactor are enabled, their states are inconsistent.
101: Pulse signal change in F4-03 does not change within the time threshold in of F1-13.
102: The running direction and pulse direction are inconsistent.
101: The motor overheat relay input remains valid for a certain time.
101, 102, 104:
• Check whether the feedback contact of the contactor acts properly.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact.
103:
• Check whether the output cables UVW of the controller are connected properly.
• Check whether the control circuit of the RUN contactor coil is normal.
101: The output of the brake contactor is inconsistent with the feedback.
102: When both feedback signals of the brake contactor are enabled, their states are inconsistent.
103: The output of the brake contactor is inconsistent with the feedback 2.
104: When both feedback
2 signals of the brake contactor are enabled, their states are inconsistent.
101 to 104:
• Check whether the brake coil and feedback contact are correct.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact.
• Check whether the control circuit of the brake contactor coil is normal.
101, 102:
• Check whether the encoder is used correctly.
• Exchange phases A and B of the encoder.
• Check whether the system and signal cables are grounded reliably.
• Check whether cabling between the encoder and the
PG card is correct.
101:
• Check whether the thermal protection relay is normal.
• Check whether the motor is used properly and whether it is damaged.
• Improve cooling conditions of the motor.
Level
5A
5A
5A
3A
- 214 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Err40
Err42
Door lock disconnected during running
Err44
Name
Elevator running reached
Down limit signal abnormal
Possible Causes Solution
The set elevator running time is reached.
101: The safety circuit signal becomes OFF.
101: The door lock circuit feedback is invalid during the elevator running.
101: The up limit switch acts when the elevator is running in the up direction.
101: The down limit switch acts when the elevator is running in the down direction.
Check the related parameter, or contact the agent or Monarch.
101:
• Check the safety circuit switches and their states.
• Check whether the external power supply is normal.
• Check whether the safety circuit contactor acts properly.
• Confirm the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact of the safety circuit contactor.
101:
• Check whether the hall door lock and the car door lock are in good contact.
• Check whether the door lock contactor acts properly.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact on the door lock contactor.
• Check whether the external power supply is normal.
101:
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the up limit switch.
• Check whether the up limit switch is in good contact.
• Check whether the limit switch is installed at a relatively low position and acts even when the elevator arrives at the terminal floor normally.
101:
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the down limit switch.
• Check whether the down limit switch is in good contact.
• Check whether the limit switch is installed at a relatively high position and thus acts even when the elevator arrives at the terminal floor normally.
Level
4B
5A
5A
4C
4C
- 215 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes Solution
Err45
Slow-down switch position abnormal
Err47
Shorting door lock circuit contactor abnormal
101: The down slow-down distance is insufficient during shaft auto-tuning.
102: The up slow-down distance is insufficient during shaft auto-tuning.
103: The slow-down position is abnormal during normal running.
104, 105: The elevator speed exceeds the maximum speed when slow-down 1 is enabled.
101: The leveling signal is inactive during re-leveling.
102: The re-leveling running speed exceeds 0.1 m/s.
103: At startup of normalspeed running, the releveling state is valid and there is shorting door lock circuit feedback.
104: During re-leveling, no shorting door lock circuit feedback or door lock signal is received 2s after shorting door lock circuit output.
101: During re-leveling or pre-open running, the shorting door lock circuit contactor outputs for continuous 2s, but the feedback is invalid and the door lock is disconnected.
102: During re-leveling or pre-open running, the shorting door lock circuit contactor has no output, but the feedback is valid for continuous 2s.
103: During re-leveling or pre-open running, the output time of the shorting door lock circuit contactor is larger than 15s.
101 to 103:
• Check whether the up slowdown 1 and the down slowdown 1 are in good contact.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the up slow-down 1 and the down slow-down 1.
104, 105:
Ensure that the obtained slowdown distance satisfies the slowdown requirement at the elevator speed.
101: Check whether the leveling signal is normal.
102: Check whether the encoder is used properly.
103, 104:
• Check whether the signal of the leveling sensor is normal.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact on the shorting door lock circuit contactor, and check the relay and wiring of the SCB-A board.
101, 102:
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact on the shorting door lock circuit contactor.
• Check whether the shorting door lock circuit contactor acts properly.
103:
• Check whether the leveling and re-leveling signals are normal.
• Check whether the re-leveling speed is set too low.
Level
4B
2B
2B
- 216 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes Solution
Err48 Door open fault
Err50
Err51
Consecutive loss of leveling signal
CAN communication abnormal
101: The consecutive times that the door does not open to the limit reaches the setting in Fb-13.
101: The consecutive times that the door does not open to the limit reaches the setting in Fb-13.
Leveling signal stuck or loss occurs for three consecutive times (Err22 is reported for three consecutive times).
101: Feedback data of
CANbus communication with the CTB remains incorrect.
101:
• Check whether the door machine system works properly.
• Check whether the CTB is normal.
• Check whether the door open limit signal is normal.
101:
• Check whether the door machine system works properly.
• Check whether the CTB is normal.
• Check whether the door lock acts properly.
• Check whether the leveling and door zone sensors work properly.
• Check the installation verticality and depth of the leveling plates.
• Check the leveling signal input points of the MCB. Check whether the steel rope slips.
101:
• Check the communication cable connection.
• Check the power supply of the
CTB.
• Check whether the 24 V power supply of the controller is normal.
• Check whether strong-power interference on communication exists.
Level
5A
5A
5A
1A
- 217 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
Fault
Code
Name Possible Causes
101: During automatic running of the elevator, the door open limit is not achieved at the present floor.
Solution
Err52
Err53 Door lock fault
Err54
HCB communication abnormal
Overcurrent at inspection startup
101: Feedback data of
Modbus communication with the HCB remains incorrect.
101: The door lock feedback signal remains active for more than 3s during door open.
102: The multiple door lock feedback signal states are inconsistent for more than
2s.
The current at startup for inspection exceeds 110% of the rated current.
101:
• Check the communication cable connection.
• Check whether the 24 V power supply of the controller is normal.
• Check whether the HCB addresses are repeated.
• Check whether strong-power interference on communication exists.
101:
• Check whether the door lock circuit is normal.
• Check whether the feedback contact of the door lock contactor acts properly.
• Check whether the system receives the door open limit signal when the door lock signal is valid.
102:
Check whether when the hall door lock signal and the car door lock signal are detected separately, the detected states of the hall door locks and car door lock are inconsistent.
• Reduce the load
• Change Bit1 of FC-00 to 1 to cancel the startup current detection function.
101: Check the door open limit signal at the present floor.
Level
1A
5A
5A
1A
Err57
Serial peripheral interface (SPI) communication abnormal
101, 102: The SPI communication is abnormal. No correct data is received with 2s of DSP communication.
103: The MCB does not match the AC drive.
101, 102: Check the wiring between the control board and the drive board.
103: Contact the agent or
Monarch.
5A
- 218 -
NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Err58
Name
Shaft position switches abnormal
Possible Causes
101: The up slowdown and down slowdown are disconnected simultaneously.
102: The up limit feedback and down limit feedback are disconnected simultaneously.
The analog input cable of the CTB or the MCB is broken.
Solution
101, 102:
• Check whether the states
(NO, NC) of the slow-down switches and limit switches are consistent with the parameter setting of the MCB.
• Check whether malfunction of the slow-down switches and limit switches exists.
• Check whether F5-36 is set correctly.
• Check whether the analog input cable of the CTB or MCB is connected incorrectly or broken.
Level
4B
1A
Note
• Fault Err41 is not recorded in the elevator stop state.
• Fault Err42 is reset automatically when the door lock circuit is shorted or 1s after the fault occurs in the door zone.
• If faults Err51 and Err52 persist, they are recorded once every one hour.
• Except the fault code and level, the number (such as 1, 101) indicates the fault subcode.
- 219 -
Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual
- 220 -
9
EMC
EMC NICE3000 new User Manual
Chapter 9 EMC
9.1 Definition of Terms
1. EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to generate electromagnetic interference that influences other local devices or systems.
In other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must have sufficient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment.
2. First environment
Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
3. Second environment
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
4. Category C1 Controller
Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the first environment
5. Category C2 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional
6. Category C3 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment
7. Category C4 Controller
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400
A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment
9.2 Introduction to EMC Standard
9.2.1 Installation Environment
The system manufacturer using the controller is responsible for compliance of the system with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or
C4.
- 222 -
NICE3000 new User Manual EMC
The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the controller must also have the CE mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2.
WARNING
If applied in the first environment, the controller may generate radio interference. Besides the
CE compliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference, if necessary.
9.2 2 Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive
1. The controller requires an external EMC filter. The recommended filter models are listed in Table 9-1. The cable connecting the filter and the controller should be as short as possible and be not longer than 30 cm. Furthermore, install the filter and the controller on the same metal plate, and ensure that the grounding terminal of the controller and the grounding point of the filter are in good contact with the metal plate.
2. Select the motor and the control cable according to the description of the cable in section 9.4.
3. Install the controller and arrange the cables according to the cabling and grounding in section 9.4.
4. Install an AC reactor to restrict the current harmonics. For the recommended models, see Table 9-2.
9.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices
9.3.1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side
An EMC filter installed between the controller and the power supply can not only restrict the interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the controller, but also prevents the interference from the controller on the surrounding equipment.
The NICE3000 new
controller satisfies the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC filter installed on the power input side. The installation precautions are as follows:
• Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC filter. The EMC filter is category I electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be in good contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and requires good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor EMC effect.
• The grounds of the EMC filter and the PE conductor of the controller must be tied to the same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously.
• The EMC filter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the controller.
The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filters for the
NICE3000 new
controller. Select a proper one based on actual requirements.
- 223 -
EMC NICE3000 new User Manual
Table 9-1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filter
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
NICE-L-C-4011
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045
NICE-L-C-4055
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
Power
Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Input
Current (A)
AC Input Filter Model
(Changzhou Jianli)
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
4.0 6.5 DL-10EBK5
5.9
8.9
10.5
14.8
DL-16EBK5
DL-16EBK5
11.0
17.0
21.0
24.0
20.5
29.0
36.0
41.0
DL-25EBK5
DL-35EBK5
DL-50EBK5
DL-50EBK5
30.0
40.0
57.0
69.0
49.5
62.0
77.0
93.0
DL-50EBK5
DL-65EBK5
DL-80EBK5
DL-100EBK5
85 113 DL-130EBK5
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
4.0
5.9
11.0
17.0
DL-16EBK5
DL-25EBK5
17.0
21.0
24.0
30.0
29.0
36.0
41.0
40.0
DL-35EBK5
DL-50EBK5
DL-50EBK5
DL-50EBK5
40.0
57.0
49.0
61.0
DL-50EBK5
DL-65EBK5
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
2.3
3.4
9.8
13.2
17.0
29.0
DL-20TH1
DL-20TH1
DL-30TH1
12.1
13.9
17.3
36.0
41.0
40.0
DL-40K3
DL-50T3
DL-50T3
23.1
33.0
49.0
61.0
DL-50T3
DL-70TH1
AC Input Filter Model
(Schaffner)
FN 3258-7-44
FN 3258-16-33
FN 3258-16-33
FN 3258-30-33
FN 3258-30-33
FN 3258-42-33
FN 3258-42-33
FN 3258-55-34
FN 3258-75-34
FN 3258-100-35
FN 3258-100-35
FN 3258-130-35
FN 3258-7-44
FN 3258-7-44
FN 3258-7-44
FN 3258-16-33
FN 3258-16-33
FN 3258-30-33
FN 3258-30-33
FN 3258-42-33
FN 2090-20-06
FN 2090-20-06
FN 2090-30-08
Consult the manufacturer.
- 224 -
NICE3000 new User Manual EMC
9.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side
An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an optional device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of input reactors.
Table 9-2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
NICE-L-C-4011
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045
NICE-L-C-4055
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
Power Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Input Current
(A)
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
4.0 6.5
5.9
8.9
11.0
10.5
14.8
20.5
AC Input Reactor Model
(Inovance)
MD-ACL-7-4T-222-2%
MD-ACL-10-4T-372-2%
MD-ACL-15-4T-552-2%
MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
17.0
21.0
24.0
30.0
40.0
57.0
69.0
85
29.0
36.0
41.0
49.5
62.0
77.0
93.0
113
MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
MD-ACL-40-4T-153-2%
MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
4.0 11.0 MD-ACL-15-4T-222-2%
5.9
17.0
17.0
29.0
MD-ACL-30-4T-222-2%
MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-113-2%
24.0
30.0
40.0
57.0
41.0
40.0
49.0
61.0
MD-ACL-50-4T-153-2%
MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
- 225 -
EMC NICE3000 new User Manual
Controller Model
NICE-L-C-2002
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
9.4 Shielded Cable
Power Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Input Current
(A)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
AC Input Reactor Model
(Inovance)
2.3
3.4
9.8
12.1
13.9
17.3
23.1
33.0
13.2
17.0
29.0
36.0
41.0
40.0
49.0
61.0
Consult the manufacturer.
9.4.1 Requirements for the Shielded Cable
The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements. Shielded cables are classified into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor cable, of which one phase conductor is PE cable.
The three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable are shown in the following figure.
PE conductor and shield
Shield
Shield
PE
PE
The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive current of the cable.
To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should be greater than 90% to enhance the shielding efficiency and conductivity, as shown in the following figure.
Insulation jacket Copper shield Copper braid
Internal insulator
Cable core
- 226 -
NICE3000 new User Manual EMC
It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. The grounding area of the shielded cable should be as large as possible. A suggested method is to fix the shield on the metal plate using the metal cable clamp so as to achieve good contact, as shown in the following figure.
Shielded cable
Metal cable clamp
Metal plate
The following figure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable.
Figure 9-1 Grounding of the shielded cable
The shield must be grounded.
9.4.2 Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable
• Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can also be used as an input cable.
• The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output filter or reactor is required.
• It is recommended that all control cables be shielded.
• It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the controller; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from interference, shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield must be well grounded.
- 227 -
EMC NICE3000 new User Manual
9.4.3 Cabling Requirement
1. The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables, with recommended distance larger than 0.5 m. The motor cables of several controllers can be laid side by side.
2. It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the output voltage of the controller, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side by side for a long distance.
3. If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the controller.
4. The power input and output cables of the controller and weak-current signal cables
(such as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel.
5. The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts can be used to improve electric potential.
6. The filter and controller should be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
7. The motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
Figure 9-2 Cabling diagram
Power cable
Min. 200 mm
Control cable
90°
Min. 300 mm
Power cable
Motor cable
NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller
90°
Control cable
Min. 500 mm
Braking resistor cable
Motor cable
Min. 500 mm
Control cable
Control cable
Power cable
90°
9.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems
The controller generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken, the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the controller interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions.
- 228 -
NICE3000 new User Manual EMC
Interference Type
Leakage protection switch tripping
Controller interference during running
Communication interference
I/O interference
Solution
• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains power supply.
• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable.
• Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable.
• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable with magnetic rings.
• Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal cable with magnetic rings.
• Connect the equipment to the common ground.
• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable with magnetic rings.
• Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source and the load side.
• Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable.
• Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the cable shield to the common grounding point.
• Enlarge the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF capacitance is suggested.
• Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is suggested.
- 229 -
EMC NICE3000 new User Manual
- 230 -
Warranty Agreement
1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months from date of manufacturing. During the warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the instructions, Inovance will be responsible for free maintenance.
2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following reasons: a. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission b. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement d. Improper operation e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device)
3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product
Warranty Card in detail.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of
Monarch.
5. The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6. If there is any problem during the service, contact Monarch's agent or Monarch directly.
7. This agreement shall be interpreted by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Service Department, Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Address: No.16, Youxiang Road, Yuexi Town, Wuzhong District, Suzhou, P.R.China
P.C.: 215104
Website: http://www.szmctc.cn
Address:
Customer information
Company name:
Product Warranty Card
Contact person:
Tel. or Email:
P.C.:
Product model:
Product information
Series No. (Attach here):
Name of supplier:
Failure information
(eg. fault code)
(Maintenance time and content):
Maintenance person:
Advertisement
Key Features
- Supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running.
- Supports direct parallel control and group control of two elevators
- Supports CANbus and Modbus communication protocols
- Supports a maximum of 40 floors
- Complies with LVD and EMC directives and standards
- Automatic voltage identification
- Energy-saving running with standby power supply
- Arrival gong disabled at night
- Energy-saving of idle door machine
